THE LIBRARY
OF
THE UNIVERSITY
OF CALIFORNIA
LOS ANGELES
CALIFORNIA
EDUCATION
SEPTEMBER
1914
* of
ARITHMETIC
BY
W. H. BAKER
AND
ADELIA R. HORNBROOK
1914
Press of Eaton & Co.
San Jose, Cal.
CALIFORNIA EDUCATION
PRICE, 50 CENTS PER NUMBER
NUMBERS NOT EXHAUSTED
VOL. I.
CONTENTS FOR NO. 2, MARCH, 1906
Editorial, Margaret E. Schallenberger, Ph. D 85
History for Seventh Grade, Agnes E. Howe, A. B 87
School Gardening, D. R. Wood, B. S 126
Country Schools and Country Life, F. B. Dresslar, Ph. D 135
CONTENTS FOR NO. 4, SEPTEMBER, 1906
Editorial, Margaret E. Schallenberger, Ph. D 199
Manual Training in Public Schools Edwin R. Snyder, A. B 201
VOL. II.
CONTENTS FOR NO. 1, JUNE, 1908
Editorial, Margaret E. Schallenberger, Ph. D '. 3
History for Eighth Grade, Agnes E. Howe, A. B 4
CONTENTS FOR NO. 3, OCTOBER, 1910
Editorial, Margaret E. Schallenberger, Ph. D 141
Nature Study and Agriculture D. R. Wood, B. S 143
CONTENTS FOR NO. 4, SEPTEMBER, 1914.
(Double Number, Price 75 cents)
Letters of a Supervisor of Arithmetic, Adelia R. Plornbrook 1
Arithmetic Methods and Reviews,.. ..W. H. Baker . 31
(COPYRIGHT, 1914, BY W. H. BAKER)
PREFACE
This manual has been written especially to meet the needs of normal
students. Incidentally it may be found useful to other students and teachers.
Besides methods, it presents reviews of subject matter. While the teacher who
has not had methods is greatly handicapped, the theory of teaching is of little
value to one who has not mastered the thing to be taught.
The letters of Mrs. Hornbrook are specifically for the student teachers of
the Training School. The first sets forth the general scheme of her work and
gives a number of illustrative exercises and games. The second gives a gen-
eral outline of the course, which will be fully amplified in the supervisor's
meetings from week to week.
The chapter on drills gives suggestive exercises intended to help the busy
teacher and to keep the pupil occupied in what will interest him and cause him
to know.
The chapter on course gives a skeleton outline for work beginning with the
fifth year. It is tentative, suggesting an order of sequence.
A large percentage of normal students have had no arithmetic since leav-
ing the grammar grades, hence their knowledge of the subject is quite limited
and their work more or less mechanical. They need a firmer grasp of the
subject matter and the feeling of security which comes with conscious mastery.
The chapter on reviews is designed to supply these needs. The arrangement
is strictly topical. While there are many simple exercises and problems the
work is in general too difficult for grammar grade pupils. The teacher, how-
ever, should know more than she is expected to teach. The many model solu-
tions are intended to furnish good forms, which is important, and incidentally
to illustrate the best ways of doing the work.
Modestly yet hopefully this manual is offered to the aspiring, earnest
teacher. The more ambitious task of presenting the psychology and pedagogy
of the subject is left for others.
W. H. B.
State Normal, San Jose,
September, 1914.
786797
INDEX
To Open Letter and First Five Years
Abacus 22
Accuracy required 5, 9, 16, 24, 28
Apparatus 9, 21, 22
Automatic knowing 13, 25
Charts, representations of the number
series up to 100, 2; as used by Miss
Smith, 6; as a basis for children's
discoveries 14
Chart of fives, 3 ; construction of, 8, 21
Chart of elevens 15
Child, the shy 7, 8
Co'nbinations and Separations, first set,
18, 27; second set, 19, 27, 29; third
set, 19, 27, 29.
Correction books 28
Correlation of the tables 23, 28
Courtesy in the schoolroom 5, 6
Diagram of classroom 20
Different ways of treating quick pupils
and slow pupils 10, 11, 14, 16, 23, 26
Discipline 4, 5, 23
Even Numbers 18, 25
Failure, a negation 5
Fifth Year, work of 30
First Year, work of 21
Fourth Year, work of 30
Fractional parts of objects and num-
bers 19, 26
Games, plays, occupations, 3-9, 12, 13,
22-30.
Geometric forms 19, 25, 27
Individual Advance 28, 29
Individual Tests 23, 27
Inventing Plays 12
Learning the Sight Series 6
Learning the Sound Series 4
Learning to Apply Number 12
Million Stick '. . 26
Movement, rhythmic, free 24
Number forms 2
Number Stories 17, 28, 30
Parallel Lines of Work 19, 27
Parents as Visitors 4
Perception Work 27
Plans 19, 20, 21
Play Spirit 22
Playing Leader 7
Presenting the Digits 7, 8, 25
Prof. Wm. James' theory of "brain-
paths" 16
Progressive written work 28
Reports 20
Running to a number 24, 25
Second Year, work of 26
Sectioning the Grades 21
Series Idea in Number 1
Storing the subconsciousness, 5, 8, 11, 13,
14, 25.
Story of a successful young teacher, 22, 23
Stunts 5, 21, 24, 27
Table of tens and its reverse 23
Teacher's tools 21, 22
Teaching ahead '..28, 29
Teaching tables of multiplication and
division 27, 28, 29. 30
Third Year, work of 28
Two periods of number learning, first
period, 13, 14, 15, 16; second 13, 16, 17
Visualization 2, 11, 13, 15
Voluntary effort 3, 5, 7, 13, 21
Written multiplication 28
Written subtraction . 28
I.
INTRODUCTION
AIM.
The manner of teaching arithmetic, and its content are determined in a large
measure by the purpose for which it is taught and the teacher's conception of its
educational value. If it is taught merely as a tool subject, only such topics will
be considered as are of direct service and the method will be such as will bring
about the mastery of these topics ,with the least possible expenditure of time and
energy. On the other hand, if only the culture vahie of the subject is taken into
consideration, the method of study and the way in which it is presented Vvili be
deemed of more importance than the topics themselves.
Arithmetic is a tool subject and this fact makes it imperative that certain
topics be included in the coursejaml taught with that degree of thoroughness that
will enable the pupil to do the work readily and accurately^ The form of work
should be such as to enable the learner to get the desired result as quickly and
correctly as is consistent with clearness.
Arithmetic as a tool is used by the pupil in pursuing his studies in the ele-
mentary schools. For this purpose he needs to understand the fundamental
processes as applied to whole numbers, common fractions, and decimalsj In the
secondary school arithmetic is needed in the mathematical work in chemistry and
in physics. For these the pupil needs a thorough grounding in common frac-
tions, decimals, and percentage. Business life demands a knowledge of percent-
age, interest, mensuration, and lumber measure in varying degrees according to
one's occupation. Since arithmetic is seldom studied outside of the elementary
school these topics should be included in the course.
Business men have devised certain self explanatory forms and direct ways
of reaching results which should be taught when the proper time comes, instead
of the cumbersome and mechanical forms usually given.
School time is growing time mentally as well as physically. Whatever the
child studies should minister to this growth, each subject or activity in its own
peculiar way. Arithmetic as a culture subject ought to be instrumental in the for-
mation of certain good habits. It ought to train to a neat, methodical arrange-
ment of material, a careful and thoughtful study of the meaning of expressions,
and a disposition to inquire for reasons and search for truth. Arithmetic ought
also to train in thinking and in clear and concise expression of relations, not by
the repetition of set formulas, but by the logical sequence.
Arithmetic is valuable as a medium through which the pupil gets informa-
tion. Customs and forms prevailing in the business world may and should be
learned. These will be recognized as of vital importance and will be lastingly
impressed if presented in living practical problems. Thru problems the child
can get a saner knowledge of the commercial and geographic importance of na-
tions and of the problems of civilization.
MENTAL ATTITUDE.
Authority Language looks to usage past and present for its rules. The
vi ARITHMETIC
historian looks to the records and traditions of the past and sifts truth from them.
"I have looked it up and I find it so", is the final statement of linguist or his-
torian.
Respect for authority is an important attitude of mind. It urges man to
stop and consider carefully before discarding present laws and customs and sub-
stituting untried -theories in their stead.
Experiment The scientist is a questioner, a doubter. He is not satisfied
with present conclusions. Authority is to him a finger pointing in a direction in
which truth may be sought, and he seeks to verify or disprove by his own inves-
tigation. "I have made careful examination and I find it so", is his tentative
statement
To this modern scientific spirit much of the world's progress is due.
Proof The element of necessity underlies the progress of the mathematician.
Given certain axioms and postulates, his conclusions follow inevitably. He may
examine his work for error of statement or oversight, but finding none he can not
question the result. When a truth has been settled mathematically there is an
end of the controversy. "I have demonstrated therefore I know", is final with
the mathematician. He can turn his attention to other problems.
This feeling of certainty can and should be in the mind of the student of
mathematics from the beginning.
INTEREST-MOTIVE.
I The educational value of a study depends largely on the amount of mental
energy called forth by it, and this is dependent on the interest with which the
study is pursued and the motive which awakens this interest. Teacher and pupil
must co-operate if there is to be substantial progress in education. A task may be
assigned and the pupil required to perfrom rUincited by fear of punishment or
hope of reward. Thru such means the pupil may acquire knowledge and skill,
but he will have little pleasure in his task, and the resultant mental growth will
be a minimum^
Use. Use is commonly considered the prime motive power,} If this use is in
the future its influence on the average elementary pupil is slight. [*Fhe child lives
in the present and for the present, and the incentive of the future usefulness of a
study supplies only an artificial stimulus^ Present use arises from present neces-
sity, and can last only while the necessity exists, hence its influence is at best but
temporary. It emphasizes the necessity for certain knowledge and serves as a
reason for the study of a particular topic, but it does not and can not furnish the
motive for the persistent study which is necessary if there is to be any perma-
nent beneficial educational result.
f" Inherent Interest The motive which will call forth persistent interested ef-
fort is that which comes from the subject itself as influenced by the teacher and
the manner of presentation^ To know, to understand, to be able to do, to be
skilled in doing bring their own reward and awaken an abiding and increasing
interest. Ken, can, and king are words closely related in language and in human
nature. He who Wens can, and he who can is made king; and rejoicing in his
power he seeks to increase it.
Arithmetic properly studied affords its own incentive and reward. To know
numbers and to be able to handle them with accuracy and intelligence give genu-
ine pleasure to the student ; there is a definiteness about the results and a cer-
tainty about the conclusions which give satisfaction ; and one feels that it is worth
while to pursue a subject in which there is a consciousness of increasing power.J
INTRODUCTION vii
Freed from drudgery and grind, it is possible for arithmetic to be made from the
first a pleasant and interesting, therefore profitable study.
Play The recreative value of play has long been recognized. Cities are re-
alizing that play may be made to have a socializing and civilizing force, and are
spending millions in purchasing and equipping grounds and providing them with
proper supervision. Play is no less play because it is wisely directed. We have
been strangely slow in recognizing the educational value of play, overlooking the
fact that a large part of our knowledge and skill have been attained thru that
channel. The boy, and sometimes the girl, learns to ride, to hunt, swim, row,
and skate thru play The farm boy learns to handle tools, drive, plow, and do a
hundred other things, thru play, and while learning enjoys himself to the full.
The eagerness with which children pursue manual training and domestic sci-
ence is due largely to the gratification of the play instinct. Children do not
play at a thing because it is easy. From the child trundling his wagon to the
football enthusiast, real play is real work gladly and rigorously performed.
The play spirit enables one to do his best under the best possible conditions.
The child's play is his work. Happy is the adult whose work becomes his
play.
The play instinct should be largely utilized in teaching arithmetic. The
child's desire to count and his joy in counting, his pleasure in constructing and
destroying that he may construct again, his inquisitiveness and eagerness in mak-
ing his own discoveries should be made to contribute to his advancement, to lay
the foundation for future discoveries, and to awaken an abiding interest.
Thruout the course the arithmetic recitation should be looked forward to
with pleasure and keen anticipation, and should leave a memory of happy attain-
ment and a determination for continued effort.
PHASES.
In considering the subject, one must recognize two distinct phases of the
work. These are: first, the ability to handle numbers, i. e., to perform the opera-
tions, addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of whole numbers, com-
mon fractions, and decimals, and extracting roots, and, second, the application
of these operations in concrete situations. Tho usually taught together, these
phases are logically distinct, and methods which will develop efficiency in one
will in no wise advance the other. The ability to determine what operation should
be applied in a given problem does not come with the ability to perform the op-
eration, neither is it learned thru a set form of words. It is a matter of experi-
ence and judgment. Within the horizon of the child's experience, and especially
vvithin the circle of his interests, he seldom makes a mistake. It is when we place
before him situations foreign to his experience or in which he has no personal in-
terest that he flounders about. Because of these facts no textbook in arithmetic
should be placed in the hands of the pupils during the first three years. During
the first year he should wrestle entirely with problems which arise out of his work
or play. It is not necessary that these problems involve number. The laying out
of a flower bed, the building of a cardboard house, or the putting together of
spools and box to make a wagon will result in growth and power. The weights
and measures in common use should be handled that they may furnish material
for future work. Problems for the second and third years should arise from the
work or play or come from the living teacher and should have direct reference to
the child's immediate environment. In later problem work, attention should
first be directed to the meaning of the problem, what is given and what is re-
quired. Care should be taken, especially when taking up a new type of problem,
that small numbers shall be used and that the operations involved be not com-
plex. Forms of analysis are of questionable value.
viii ARITHMETIC
Rationalization-t-Shall the operations be taught as a matter of pure memory
and drill, or shall there be an appeal to the understanding? Whatever method
is adopted there must be much resort to drill and much memory work must be re-
quired. The pupil must finally come to perform the work more or less automat-
ically ; accuracy and a greater or less degree of speed must become habitual. If,
however, memory work alone is resorted to the result will be that the pupil will
become mechanical in the extreme^ Mechanical in performing his operations, the
child will almost certainly become a guesser as to what operation should be per-
formed. Too many will be so under the best cqnditions^^On the other hand
many pedagogical sins have been committed andmuch harm has been done thru
attempts at rationalization. Authors and teachers alike have erred in this re-
spect; bad forms have been impressed and bad habits have been encouraged.
CThese forms^eing placed before the child when he is learning a process im-
press themselves upon him and they become to him a necessary part of the opera-
tion. Even the use of2(splints.beans, counters, and the like) in rationalization,
may become stumbling blocks^Some pupils become slaves to objects, and can
work intelligently only so far as they can see or image the object, and when such
objective work is impossible because of the largeness of the numbers fail utterly
or become the worst of mechanical workers. Others resort to marks on boards
or papers, count the fingers, or make motions in the air. A few survive and be-
come fairly good mathematicians despite bad methods. In the following pages
the attempt is made to bring about an intelligent appreciation of the processes
and yet avoid the e\ils referred to, for only by so doing can the work be made
enjoyable. What is learned as a distasteful task has little value educationally^
It' must not be expected that any pupil can understand all the processes as their
use becomes necessary. The rationale of some operations is too difficult for chil-
dren at the age at which such operations should be learned. In other cases it is of
little consequence. The inversion of the divisor in division of fractions is an in-
stance of the first kind, why to begin at the left in division is of the second. Many
pupils will get little good out of any attempt at rationalization. This fact, how-
ever, should not keep the teacher from making any such attempt. Some seeds
may rot in the soil, others may be long in germination, but for the sake of those
which grow we must not withhold the planting. Mr. McMurray's rule is not a
bad one, tho not without exceptions : "It is folly to sacrifice the present for the
future. Any subject that cannot be fairly comprehended at the time it is present-
ed should be excluded" (Ed. Rev., Vol. 27, p. 482). While, then, we must not
attempt complete rationalization, whenever the child of ordinary ability can be
led to comprehend the reason for an operation, he should be given the opportunity.
SPECIAL FEATURES.
In a few respects the course herein outlined differs from others.
Exposure-Play In the work outlined for the primary grades Mrs. Horn-
brook has shown the happy way in which play may be made to count toward real
acquisition in arithmetic. She has outlined a number of interesting exercises,
and these will suggest many others to the resourceful teacher. These exercises
build up and keep continually before the child a useful picture of numbers to one
hundred, the full value of which can be appreciated only by the teacher who has
patiently and thoughtfully used it. They bring the child into the presence of laws
thinly veiled, and the pupils soon begin to find out for themselves
facts about numbers. Thru these exposures and thru play the subcon-
scious mind is charged. By what alchemy it works we do not know, but we
know that thru it the child finds pleasure and profit in handling numbers.
Law -An attempt is made to lead the child to investigate for himself and'
thru such investigation to discover truth. The pleasure of personal discovery is
great and the habit of looking for reasons and laws is a good educational asset.
There are many useful laws governing numbers so simple that the child can
INTRODUCTION ix
grasp them. These are utilized and emphasized. Children take delight in certain
exercises, such as counting by twos, tens or fives. These pleasurable exercises
are made to do service in learning the combinations of these numbers in addi-
tion, multiplication, etc.
Groups The pupils are encouraged to recognize certain group results such
as the groups making eight, nine, ten, and so on. These groups are emphasized
at the proper time and the habit of adding them as a single number is formed.
Groups making nine should be learned after the child learns to add nines ; in gen-
eral a group making a given number should be learned when the child has learned
to add that number.
.Fixing The pupils are not required or expected to use a combination in a
miscellaneous way before it has been well fixed in the memory. To do so is likely
to result in bad habits and inaccuracies. To fix a combination requires much
repetition and it ought to be interested repetition. This is secured thru counting,
decade work, and simple column work, making use of the eye, the ear, and the
sense of rhythm.
Small Numbers In the work of the first three years no attempt is made to
deal with large numbers. The pupil is taught to read and write numbers to
10,000, but he has no occasion to use large numbers at this age and the mechan-
ical handling of them is postponed. After the child has grown into a knowledge
of the principle of place value he is less likely to become a machine. Many chil-
dren take a delight in reading and writing large numbers and in handling them.
Such are not discouraged. Their questions are patiently answered and their
feats receive due recognition.
Eeasons Rationalization is not sought thru categorical statement of a gen-
eral principle. However apt such a statement may be it is likely to be another's
rather than the pupil's reason. A method of presentation is sought which will
be its own explanation, to be comprehended today or next year.
Inspection Much use is made of inspection work. It is no longer necessary
to find factors, divisors, and multiples of large numbers, and for this reason me-
chanical methods of finding such factors, etc., are discarded, and in their stead
are given methods that will reinforce the power of inspection. Thruout the
course such methods are used as will contribute to the mastery of number.
When possible a topic, e. g., common divisors, is introduced for the first time
in connection with its use, and is then dealt with only sufficiently to serve the pur-
pose then at hand. It is later taken up by itself and given full statement.
Efficiency That method of teaching is most efficient w r hich accomplishes the
desired result with the best expenditure of time and effort on the part of the
pupil and teacher, without at the same time doing violence to the child's intelli-
gence or will. Arithmetic may be learned as an assigned task accompanied by
the requisite amount of drill, but such a method will produce mechanical work-
ers and haters of arithmetic. Time may be wasted on useless games and exer-
cises which do not contribute to real advancement. Both extremes should be
avoided. Interesting plays, games and exercises which count in the final equip-
ment may be found. Such have been sought in the following pages. No game
has been recommended merely because it is pleasing, and the exercises being in-
telligent and purposeful appeal to the child's interested effort. Crutches should
be avoided, and forms for workj and ways of doing it which will later be discard-
ed should not be introduced. An exception to the last statement is permissible
when the form finally adopted is an abbreviation of the fuller form which should
be used at first: e. g., the full and the abbreviated forms for addition and sub-
traction of fractions.
x ARITHMETIC
Efficiency demands that the operations be performed in the most direct man-
ner, the method which leads to the mastery of number being preferred. Inspec-
tion work should be encouraged and labor saving devices should be taught in
such a manner as to challenge the pupil's best efforts. Actual business forms and
business customs should be taught and followed.
Thoroness should be the final goal. The processes that need to be learned
are not so numerous that they cannot be mastered, and the feeling of security is
very satisfying. There are too many boys and girls who are afraid when they
encounter a problem involving fractions, and who surrender when the operation
involves the handling of a complex decimal.
In most business operations it is true that only small fractions are used, and
that the business man is satisfied if the final result is correct to two or three deci-
mal places. It is also true that science and business are seeking greater accuracy
m small things. The astronomer measures time and angles to a hundredth of a
second, the axle of the automobile is measured to a thousandth of an inch, and
the price of electricity is quoted in hundred thousandths of a cent. ''Now a mer-
chant needs astronomy to see them (the profits), and when he locates them^they
are out some where near the fifth decimal place". The final result can be ac-
curate to two decimal places only when the successive steps have been kept well
in hand. A result may be more accurate or less accurate than the data according
as the error has been multiplied or divided. The pupil should be trained to dis-
criminate.
It will be seen that the aim of all our work is to present the subject mat-
ter in such a way as to meet the psychological conditions of the learners. As
the natural aptitudes and the environmental conditions of individual children
vary greatly, it is evident that in order to reach efficiency there must be a
sectioning of the grades into groups, by which the quick and successful chil-
dren are given freedom to advance at their own rate while the slow or unsuc-
cessful pupils are allowed to carry on their work in the way natural to them.
It is also important that no thought of inferiority or superiority in the work of
any of the groups should be given to the children or held by their teachers.
There can be no efficient instruction unless the inherent powers and natural
rhythm of the children are considered in the teaching effort. The working
plans of the Training School are such as to secure this division of the grades
into small sections at varying stages of progress. This makes possible that
adaptation of the work to individual needs and powers without which the most
careful methods of presentation do not insure success.
This idea of definitely and frankly adjusting the work to the individual
appears again and again in the early pages of the manual and is assumed thru-
out the book.
AN OPEN LETTER
From a Supervisor of Arithmetic to the Students Teaching
Arithmetic in
THE TRAINING DEPARTMENT
of
THE STATE NORMAL SCHOOL AT SAN JOSE, CAL.
Copyright, 1913, By Adelia R. Hornbrook.
FRIENDS:
Altho not all of you can be so fortunate as to be assigned to the teach-
ing of the little children who begin number work, you will see at once that it is
important that every one of you shall have a clear understanding of the aims,
the principles and the processes of these beginnings as well as those of the later
work. This is necessary in order that the work of each of you during your twelve
weeks of practice may be rightly related to that of others.
In these few weeks you are to begin your professional study of children's
minds in their reactions upon the truths of mathematics. Your success in teach-
ing will depend: first, upon your habit of close, intelligent observation of these
reactions ; second, upon your skill in interpreting what you observe ; and third,
upon your ability to present the facts of mathematics in ways suitable to the
minds of the children as you find them to be. This letter is written to help you.
It refers to the work of the first four grades.
There are two ideas of number, viewed in the light of child psychology,
which underlie the plans of teaching here presented. These are the
"number series idea" and the "number form idea.'' If you are to
use the plans intelligently you will need to understand these
basic principles. In Dr. Stanley Hall's Educational Problems, Vol. 2, pp. 350-
356, you will find an excellent statement of the Series Idea in Number, and many
known facts about Number Forms, with a short, encouraging reference to the
application of these ideas in the practical plans, some of which are given in this
letter.
The Series Idea The number series idea was brought to the notice of American
In Number educators by an article in the Pedagogical Seminary for October,
1897, written by Dr. D. E. Phillips, then of Clark University. It
is now generally accepted by writers on primary arithmetic and is practically
applied in most modern textbooks of that subject.
Very briefly stated, the idea is this ;
Ordinary children in their early years think of numbers as a series of sounds,
"one, two, three," etc. They like to bring this series into their consciousness and
play with it. They repeat these number words, generally attaching no more
meaning to them than to "eeny, meeny, miny mo," but enjoying the rhythms, the
repetitions, and the jingle of this sound series. They love to show to grown-ups
their new and interesting accomplishment of counting.
Your first work will be to find out how well your individual children can
count and then to help them to count perfectly to 100. This is as pleasant to them
as any play. There may be a little stiffness or shyness at first, but that will dis-
appear as you get into happy, sympathetic relations with the little people.
2 ARITHMETIC
Query. Can you recall any instances in your school life in which your suc-
cess in learning was affected, either favorably or unfavorably by your feelings
toward your teacher or hers toward you?
Note. The queries scattered thru this letter are to be answered by you
at the weekly conferences.
Number The discovery of the existence in many minds of certain definite
Forms visualizations called "number forms" was given to the world in 1883
by Sir Francis Galton, in the book, Inquiry into Human Faculty.
It has been confirmed by many later investigators.
Stated in very condensed form, the facts are these :
Many children in their early gropings among numbers and figures, make a
mental picture of the number series, usually up to 100, sometimes far beyond.
They visualize the number symbols, i, 2, 3, etc. as a succession of figures. They
see them mentally at definite distances and directions from one another as if on
a printed page. The lines of figures thus formed in the mental picture are some-
times straight or broken, sometimes curved, sometimes in spirals, sometimes
in parallels. They differ in different minds. It is estimated by psychologists that
about five per cent of adults retain and use the number forms that they built up
in childhood, as a help in working with numbers. Sometimes the forms are very
complicated, twisted and irregular like one that was given to me last year by a
Junior student. Altho it seemed a very inconvenient form to use, she assured me
that it was a constant help to her in reckoning. Of the many hundreds of num-
ber forms that have been reported, mostly irregular, only one was complained of
by its possessor as being "troublesome" on account of the bending and doubling
of its lines. But certainly the possessor of an even, regular number form like
that given to me by a teacher in our school last year is fortunate. You will find
in the school library a most interesting and instructive article upon this subject,
The Genesis of Number Forms, by Dr. D. E. Phillips, in the American Jour-
nal of Psychology, Vol. 8, No. 4.
The facts concerning these spontaneous visualizations of the number series
have, as Pres. Butler of Columbia University remarked editorially (Educational
Review, May, 1893), "a most direct bearing upon the teaching of elementary
arithmetic." They are of great practical importance to us, for instead of allowing
our pupils to form irregular, inconvenient mental diagrams of the number series,
or none at all, we are going to give to each child by means of charts and other
apparatus an opportunity to use freely a visible, tangible representation of the
series up to 100 in a regular unchanging form. With this he can make his own
discoveries of the facts of number, or can readily perceive the number facts
pointed out by his teachers and classmates.
This is not a new, untried project. Plans based upon this idea I began to
work out in 1886, presenting some of them in an educational magazine in
1893 and in a textbook in 1898. For many years I have had the pleasure of
knowing that other educators were working with the same thought. In the
recent writings of some leading California educators the use of charts similar
to ours is urged. One of them is given in our state textbook of primary arith-
metic (p. 17). Some happy results were obtained in our school last year by the
student teachers of one grade who used some of these plans quite successfully with
a short period of supervisory help. We are expecting fine results from your work
this year, and we are planning to give you all the supervisory, informational
help you need, and not a bit more. We want you to be independent, alert,
fertile-minded workers.
This year (1913) there will be three or four grades beginning number work
from the 3 B down. The work here described is planned for first and second
grade pupils, and is made suitable for children thru the 3 B grade by simply al-
lowing them to advance more rapidly.
1
2
3
4
11
12
13
14
21
22
23
24
31
32
33
34
41
42
43
44
51
52
53
54
61
62
63
64
OPEN LETTER 3
The First In the first lessons the number chart of fives, as given below * is
Lessons before the class.
71 81 91
72 82 92
73 83 93
74 84 94
5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95
6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 96
7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 97
8 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 98
9 19-29 39 49 59 69 79 89 99
1O 20 30 40 50 6O 7O 80 90 1OO
The chart is copied on the board in large, plain figures. The multiples of
five are written in larger figures than the other numbers with crayon of some
light color, never in a dull color.
Queries. Why should these figures be large and bright? Can you give any
psychological fact that suggests a rea-sonf
There are three different things which the child must master in his early
work. They must not be confused. They are :
1st. The sound series up to 100.
2nd. The sight series up to 100.
3rd. The use of these series in applying number to objects.
It will take many weeks for the little ones to master these three basic
elements. For those below the 3 B grade fifteen or twenty minutes a day are al-
lowed; for the 3 B and those above, forty minutes. Each group will advance at
its own rate, doing what it can from day to day without hurry or worry. We
shall use many different exercises and simple childish plays. Children naturally
love number and they love to play. We will combine these two natural interests
and as a result will obtain clear perceptions of number, and the joy which chil-
dren find in doing something worth while in the company of their mates.
Organized, purposeful play, guided by the teacher, leads to voluntary, result-
ful work by the pupils.
*The charts in this pamphlet are taken from Hornbrook's Primary Arithmetic by
permission of the American Book Co.
4 ARITHMETIC
Learning The Most children beginning number work know a part of the
Sound Series sound series. They can count a little way with more or less
correctness. So we shall begin by using this knowledge as a basis,
passing gradually "from the known to the unknown."
There are many good ways of beginning the study of number. I have selected
one of them and will describe some typical work of a teacher, whom we will call
Miss Smith and will image as a young woman of charming personality, working
with one of our Training School groups of about a dozen children. This work
is not given as a model to be copied, but as a series of concrete illustrations of
principles to be interpreted. Thoughtfully read, it will give you mental pictures
of schoolroom activities differing probably from those in which you figured as
a child. Educational thought has changed very rapidly in the last few years, and
you have come to the San Jose Normal to get the thought of the present, not of
the past. Your previous training in the department of Psychology, reinforced by
special reading, will enable you to understand the psychological principles upon
which the plans are based.
It is the first lesson. Miss Smith begins in the usual way by talking with the children
about counting. One child thinks he can count to 30, another believes that he can count
"a whole lot" and so on. "Now all count with me/' she says, and begins to count slowly.
The "counting" is simply giving the number names in their true order. Their significance
is not considered at all. That comes later. The children are now getting the sounds in
their true sequence. As the counting goes on, the teacher makes mental notes of the pupils
who fall by the wayside, and of those who go on triumphantly until she gives the signal
to stop. The signal is given as soon as she sees signs of failing powers or flagging interest.
In this first lesson the young teacher begins her study of the minds of the children
whom she is to teach. "What can this child do and how does he do it, and how can I best
help him to do the next thing?" are frequently recurring thoughts.
In the ideal conditions of your work, with your groups of about a dozen
children, each in its own pleasant little classroom, with sympathetic supervisory
help close at hand and with the children looking to you as the bringer of some-
thing new and interesting, it will be only a short time until, if you use intelligent
effort, you will be able to see your whole group as individuals, each with his own
abilities and temporary inabilities, which you are to help him remove. Then the
true interchange of thought between teacher and pupil will take place. You will
watch and assist the development of the mathematical sense of each child. He
will learn to look upon you as his own personal helper. The more clearly he sees
you in that light, the more trustfully and happily he will follow your guidance.
When this beautiful intimacy of thought is established, the need for discipline
in the old harsh sense disappears. Instead we shall have obedience, pleasure,
and clear understanding.
Because the presence of outsiders breaks the flow of thought between pupils
and teachers, you and your children are to be shielded as much as possible from
outside visitors. The parents of the pupils are more than welcome. We are
anxious to consult them. They can help us to understand the children. It will
be well to have it understood that when, for instance, Mary's mother or father
comes, Mary shall do an unusual amount of reciting in order that they may judge
of her attainments 'or defficiencies. And so with each child. Parents who have en-
trusted their children to our care are in sympathy with us in our work. They
have a right to know of their children's success and of their temporary tailures,
if they care to follow the course of instruction closely. Altho we earnestly desire
that they shall not break that course by attempting to teach their children, we
are anxious to learn from them all we can about the ways in which the minds of
our pupils react upon the work.
Let us return to our ideal teacher whom we left watching her little ones as
they counted.
OPEN LETTER
After the group counting, which has served to break the ice, the individual activities
begin, the voluntary work or "stunts" as they are called. "Who wants to count all alone
for us?" says Miss Smith. Volunteers are ready with the usual signal. Tom is chosen. Glad
of his chance to display his accomplishments, he begins to rattle off the numbers.
A point of importance suggests itself here.
Perhaps Tom blunders, puts 19 directly after 15. As soon as the mistake is
corrected either by himself or by some one designated by the teacher, he must
stop. Perfection is the standard and nothing short of it is acceptable. The slight-
est error "spoils the stunt." This rule is to be invariable and is explained at the
first lesson in an easy, pleasant way as "the way we play the game." So Tom
sits down encouraged by a word or a look from the teacher to feel that he will
"soon do it all right." Mary has the floor, and Tom, instead of stumbling along in
a maze of uncertainty with half grasped, embarrassing corrections from his
teacher, hears Mary's quiet smooth counting. If he is an alert, sensitive child,
he follows Mary's performance attentively with a keen desire to equal it. If he
is slow, unawakened as yet, his attention may be slack, but he is unconsciously
becoming familiarised with the number series.
Another point. Henry may say with pride, "I can count to 100, and Tom
can only count to 15." This is Henry's mistaken way of trying to win the ap-
proval of his teacher and classmates. It is contrary to the spirit of respect and
consideration for others which is to rule. The teacher may say, "Can you?"
adding in a low, confidential tone with a very significant look, "But you mustn't
say anything about it." Or she may answer in a light, easy way, "Well, if that
is so we will have to help him, won't we?"
Query. To what feeling does each of these answers appeal?
The oral counting is continued from day to day, along with the chart work and the
counting of objects which I shall describe later. After a time Miss Smith introduces decade
counting. "We will count by 'parts' now," she says. "Who can begin at 21 and count?"
Later as a little anticipation of the process of adding numbers to 20, 30, etc., she asks, "Who
can begin at 41 and count five," or "Who is ready to begin at 71 and count ten?" Not
quite knowing her pupils yet, she sometimes suggests feats of ability that prove to be be-
yond them. In that case she quickly and smilingly substitutes something else. She does
not invite failure and confused, unhappy thinking by forcing upon her pupils anything for
which she sees that they are not yet ready.
One of the wisest things written lately about education is the following from
a little book; The Montessori System by Dr. Theodate Smith, of Clark Uni-
versity. "Failure is a negation showing that the child is not yet ready for that par-
ticular exercise," p. vii.
A child may advantageously see work done by his mates that he does not
yet understand. He will not be confused by it unless he himself is called upon
for it. Hence the value of the principle of "voluntary effort" used so much in
our school and in other schools of the modern type. Calling for voluntary work
the teacher is careful to see that each child has the opportunity to express his
thought, and she cares particularly for the weak little ones who need her help
before they are able to present the results of straight thinking.
It is to be observed that, altho much freedom is allowed, Miss Smith's class-
room is not ruled by the children's whims. She knows that she is wiser than her
pupils and that upon her rests the responsibility of the work, that the children are
there to learn and that they must not be hindered by the chaotic conditions which
would arise without a competent person in control. She is the gentle, calm,
confident director of affairs whose directions are to be obeyed. That is what we
expect you to be in your classrooms. The principal of the Training School and
every one of your supervisors will give you all needed support in that position.
ARITHMETIC
Learning The At first the children see the chart as a mixed-up blurry pic-
Sight Series ture of meaningless lines and surfaces. But the series of number
words which they have learned is the key that will unlock for them all its values.
After the oral counting in the first day's lesson, Miss Smith begins the chart work
that is to lead to the knowledge of the sight series, and to the realization of many of the
relations of numbers. Calling attention to the chart she says, "All the numbers that you
have been saying are on this chart, and I am going to show you how to find them." (With
her little ones she does not make the distinction between "numbers" and "figures" that exact
mathematical phrasing would demand, nor can we.) She begins to name in order very
deliberately the numbers in the first column, pointing to each as she names it. She soon
stops and calls on the group to count the numbers while she points. Then she asks, "Who
can point while we count?" She chooses Louise, whose power of attention is weak. The
child is glad to take the pointer, but she is unable to keep in touch with the counting of
the group, and soon has to turn the pointer over to some one else. Miss Smith does not
show any sign of disapproval either by word or look, nor does she feel any disapproval. She
makes it easy for the child, just as she would for a guest. This is the custom in her
classroom.
The ideals of courtesy, when realized in the schoolroom, prevent children
from expressing contempt or other unpleasant feelings toward their mates. And
in this training school of ours, in which you and I have the sacred responsibility
of influencing the dawning thoughts of children and in which this described work
of our imagined Miss Smith is really the suggested, prophetic outline of your own
work, there are not only ideals of courtesy and good form but there are ideals
still higher. We have all heard them beautifully expressed by the principal of the
school and by other teachers the ideals of love and mutual helpfulness and so-
cial service. These ideals are to be found not only in our Normal School but in
many schools thruout the country. They are a part of the best educational think-
ing of the present day. They are displacing the selfish, individualistic thought of
the old rod-ruled schools.
Miss Smith is trying to hold up these higher ideals, trying to do it in a quiet,
non-preaching way by her own attitude towards the failing ones, and by her de-
cisions in the little social questions that arise in the classroom. As far as they
are realized these nobler ideals prevent the children not only from expressing,
but from having unpleasant thoughts about their neighbors.
In the case of Louise the teacher knows that blame, reinforced by the scorn
of the class, would be positively harmful to the child, and so she protects her
Louise can see that she has failed in this matter. Sooner or later, unless she is
subnormal, the desire to equal her mates and the interest in learning will
lead her to give voluntary attention. In the meantime while the power of at-
tention is strengthening, Miss Smith tries to be helpful by giving the child fre-
quent opportunities to take part in the exercises under favorable conditions.
In this description you will observe that I do not fix the limit of a day's les-
son, but simply give the exercises in a continuous story, in the order in which they
follow one another. Of course only one new exercise should be given at a lesson.
The amount of work and the number of different exercises to be used each day,
depend upon the way in which the children respond to the work and upon the
teacher's judgment of it at the time. No grade limits are given here. Each
student teacher will take up the work at the beginning of a term where her pred-
ecessor has left it.
Miss Smith starts the "stunts" in the learning of the sight series by asking, "Who
wants to count and point all alone?" George succeeds in counting to the end of the
column. "Stop at the 10," says the teacher. None are allowed to go beyond 10 that day
nor for many days.
Query. Why should the pupils not be allowed to go beyond the first ten
numbers at this time?
A person entering the room might suppose that the children were reading the figures,
but generally they are as yet only finding the names of the figures by counting. As the
next step Miss Smith points to the figure 3 and turning to one of her quickest pupils says :
"Ruth, what number is this?" "3," replies Ruth. "How did you find out?" Ruth takes the
pointer and explains, "I began up here with the 1, and I just counted right down and when
OPEN LETTER . 7
I said 3 that was it." Thus taught and helped by reinforcing suggestions from the teacher,
others name figures. It is explained to them that they must take all the time they need,
and be very careful. If they hurry or are careless they may mske a mistake, which would
be a very bad thing indeed.
On another day after they have "named numbers" for a short time they begin to
"hunt numbers."
In the previous exercise a figure was pointed out and the pupils had to give
its name. In this "hunting" game the name is given and the child must find the
figure. These two reverse ways of relating the number symbol and its name are
used by Miss Smith in all the little, childish plays by means of which she leads to
the easy, accurate reading of numbers. These forms of play, like the oral count-
ing and the chart counting, are given on successive days until no longer needed.
"Look at the chart and find 4." says Miss Smith. They look as directed and count
silently, some making gestures towards the chart until they come to "4," and are ready
to point out the figure. Unwilling that the class shall hear an error, the teacher is careful
to call at first upon the most apt pupils. When the exercise is understood she gives a new
form to it by asking, "Who knows a number for the class to find?" Helen's hand is raised.
"Come and whisper it to me," says Miss Smith. Helen comes forward and whispers, "5,"
"Give it to the class," is the direction. When it has been found Helen looks shyly up at
Miss Smith and says, "I know where another number is." She is allowed to give it to the
class and they find it.
A child who comes forward and directs the group work is called a "leader."
Nearly every child loves to "play leader." Of course a blunder robs him of that
dignity at once, but it is often necessary for a pupil to give up leadership wlrile
his work is still perfect in order to give the others a chance. These are called
"true leaders." The teacher keeps a list of the true leaders. Later they will be
allowed to do special work.
At this stage the children generally are not yet able to recognize the figures at sight.
They are learning to see them as separate things in the chart picture and the next step is
to learn their forms. Miss Smith has a set of figures, six or seven inches high, mounted
on pasteboard. (This September I am going to lend you a set until you can get them from
calendars). She sits before the class, holds up the 1 and running her finger down its length,
says, "Who wants to come up and go over this nice big 1 just as I do?" Every one except
a very slow, shy little fellow is eager to come. After several have "gone over" the big 1,
moving a little bunch of fingers over it without touching it, she turns to the shy child and
in an easy, off-hand way calls upon him to come and try. If he still shrinks she excuses him
for the present, saying to herself, "I must look out for that little chap. He will need special
attention."
In our school where the principle of voluntary effort is applied in so many
delightful ways, some of which you can see any day by spending the assembly
period in one of the school halls of assembly, it is unusual to find a child who
would refuse such an opportunity as Miss Smith offers. Such a child needs to
have his work skillfully adapted to his capacity. Gradually under the sunshine
of the teacher's kind thought in the genial atmosphere of a classroom in which con-
sideration for others is the ideal, the little one's fear and reserve will melt away.
He will begin to work. And then how happy he will be when he finds himself
doing the things that the others are doing, those puzzling, embarrassing things
that he had thought too hard for him even to try.
The big 1 having been traced, Miss Smith holds up the 2. This is more difficult. Some
start at the wrong place or go in the wrong way. The small hands have to be guided. "You
must always begin at the nose of the 2," said a little girl, "and go right round to the tail;
and you mustn't ever rub the fur the wrong way."
In the comments which our pupils are encouraged to make, subject to the
laws of courtesy and good sense, they show to us the workings of their minds
and they often give useful suggestions. A little boy in one of my experimental
classes last year called the big 2, which I gave him for a copy, a "papa-2." and
proceeded to make a smaller one which he called a "matnma-2," and one still
smaller which he called a "little-2," This interested other pupils and one of them
added a tiny little figure which he called a "baby-2." We allow the pupils to ex-
press their childish fancies but do not impose them upon other children to whom
they do not appeal.
Miss Smith does not introduce any more figures that day because she is not willing
to risk confusing her pupils by presenting too many forms at one lesson.
8 ARITHMETIC
Queries. When several strangers are introduced to you at one time do you
ever have difficulty in applying the right names to them afterwards? You hare
an adult brain. . How about the brains of little children in comparison with yours ?
Tomorrow Miss Smith will have big 2's written on the board, one for each child to
trace. Those who do it right will be allowed to take a crayon and trace the figure. Then
they will copy it. Arm movement "with a good big swing" is the ideal she will set before
them. When 2 is so well learned that it can be recognized anywhere she will present the
3 in the same way, then the other digits in their order. She never presents more than one
digit at a lesson. When 4 is reached, Miss Smith does not require the pupils to trace the
printed figures which she shows. Instead she tells them, "When we write the 4 we always
leave the top open." Then she sets them to tracing and copying the large 4's, that she has
written on the board. She knows that children are apt to turn the 6 the wrong way, so she
gives them much practice on that figure, insisting upon the arm movement.
An interesting psychological explanation of this tendency to reverse figures
and drawings has been given and we will discuss it at one of our weekly confer-
ences. At any rate we will prevent our pupils from reversing their figures if we
can.
There are two ways of tracing the 8, Miss Smith insists upon the movement used by
the supervisor of writing.
Each day before taking up the new figure the pupils write those already learned in
a column like the first column of the chart. It pleases them to see their columns grow as
the new figures are added, and their interest grows with it. If, however, any member ot
the group blunders in recognizing or copying a figure already given no new figure will be
given that day. Instead some other exercise will be used.
With regard to this matter of diverting attention from errors you will find
one thing which may seem to you at first to be strange, altho experienced teach-
ers know it well and profit by it. When your pupils get wrong ideas and their
little brains are "all muddled up," if you labor with them showing them the
right thing in contrast with the wrong, you will only make matters worse. All
your strenuous efforts are worse than wasted. Instead of laboring, the skilful
teacher simply shows the right, briefly and easily, and then turns to something
else. On another day she leads carefully up to that upon which the pupils were con-
fused. The chances are that in the interval certain little modifications of their
brains have taken place as the result of her work and of the children's desire to
know its meaning and that because of this interval the subject is easily made
clear to them. If not, it is evident that they are "not yet ready" for that particular
exercise.
Query. Why is it in the long run a saving of time and effort to present the
digits so slowly and carefully?
Many other exercises are going on in Miss Smith's room from day to
day by which the children are learning the sight series and all unconsciously
getting the first dim ideas of the relations of numbers, ideas that will brighten
into consciousness later.
In one of the first lessons Miss Smith supplied each child with a chart for his
own personal use. Soon she will have her pupils make the charts for themselves.
The chart was made as follows:
Upon a piece of Manila paper one foot square (obtained from the supply rooms) she
drew, very lightly, a ten-inch square. She divided it into inch squares by light, almost
invisible lines, and wrote the hundred numbers in the squares. The multiples of five are
larger than the other numbers and are written in bright colors with crayola. After the
children have examined their charts and given all the comments or questions that she thinks
worth while, she sets them to counting and pointing out the numbers. Then (probably on
the next day) she gives to each child a folded paper containing squares of pasteboard
slightly smaller than inch-squares upon which are pasted printed figures cut from calendars
or made by rubber stamps. (Written figures may be used, but they should not be written
with a pen. They need to be clear and bold. If cotton is wrapped smoothly around the
point of a pencil and the pencil is dipped in ink, figures can be made with it almost as clear
and bright as print.) Multiples of five are distinguished by color and size. Each paper con-
tains only the first ten numbers. She allows the children to work in pairs if they choose.
The thing to be done is to place the pasteboard numbers upon the corresponding chart
numbers. To place them where they belong and "right side up with care" is not an easy
matter for the little people. It furnishes interesting occupation for many days, a short
time each day.
OPEN LETTER 9
Some day after the ten numbers are placed on the charts in due order, Miss Smith
shows the children "how to play with hidden numbers." The first direction is, "Turn the
squares over just where they are." "Now the numbers are all hidden out of sight," she says.
"Let us see if everybody knows where they are." Stepping to Roy's desk, she puts a finger
on a pasteboard square and asks, "What is under this?" "6," he replies "How did you
know, Roy?" "I counted them. I know them all. This is 4 and this is 9 and " She stops
him to address the class. "Be ready. Roy and I are coming around to see if you know
where the numbers are hidden." "What is it, Walter?" she says to a boy whose hand is
raised. "I know them all, too." He quickly designates some of the numbers. "Walter
will take this outside row, Roy the other, and I will take the middle rows.
Query. Why is it better for her to take the middle rows?
Another day after the numbers are hidden she starts the game of "letting the numb-
ers out." "We are going to let the numbers out of the places where they are hidden," she
says. "Uncover 4." The children count, if necessary, until 4 is reached, pick up the square
and lay it over to the left of the chart column. The teacher calls on James to "play leader."
He comes forward and designates the numbers to be uncovered, leaving her free to watch
individuals. Some, without counting, know the positions of the hidden numbers. There
is no chance of a mistake if the child is careful to verify his thought by counting. Under
these circumstances a mistake is not to be tolerated. Miss Smith emphasizes the idea
strongly beforehand, (not, of course, after the mistake has been made. I hope you will
emphasize it in the same way with your pupils.) In spite of the teacher's emphasis upon
care and upon "counting till you know," Kate, an irresponsible little creature, sitting in the
front row, blunders. (Such things happen right along as you will find). Miss Smith steps
over to Kate's desk and says quietly, "Oh, I am so sorry. You will have to stop." (Rule
of the game.) "You may watch Anna's work." Anna is a slow, painstaking worker. As
Kate sees her uncovering the numbers without a mistake she says to herself, "I can do
that." The next time the game is played she does do it.
Queries. Why should a teacher place her unsuccessful pupils in the front
row or as far forward as possible? Usually they prefer to sit as far back as
possible. Why?
Another exercise, "building ten," is given with the same purpose of helping the
pupils to a knowledge of the number symbols and their relative positions. The individual
charts are put out of sight. The pupils arrange the little number squares on their desks in
the order of the numbers 1 10. If they are uncertain they must refer to the chart. They
must not make mistakes when it is so easy to prevent them by simply looking at the chart.
When they are able to build the first ten without help from the chart, or from any person,
they tc.ke up the next decade in the same way. Miss Smith has wrapped the number
squares 11 20 in papers of a different color from those which contained the first ten. She
does this in order that s>ie may easily distinguish them. She keeps each set of papers in
a separate marked envelope and the envelopes in a box in the closet. Before giving out
the papers she makes herself sure that the set is perfect. When gathering them up she
appoints some one as a committee to see that none are lost. This committeeship is eagerly
sought.
The preparation and care of material and apparatus for number play and
number work demand much attention to detail. But it is vastly easier to attend
to material and apparatus than it is to teach number successfully without such
concrete aids to thinking in the early stages of the work.
At the time of this writing there are in Prof. Baker's office a thousand each
of tags, test cards and square feet of Manila paper, all cut to size and waiting
for you to write clear, bold figures upon them, with your cotton-covered pencil-
points or some equally effective substitute. There are also three new tagboards
besides my old one. These will be passed around as needed. In Miss McCabe's
office there are three photographs on the wall showing children working with
apparatus. One picture shows two little boys down on the floor, "building tens"
with figures cut from calendars. A large piece of cambric has been laid down
for them to work upon. (You can use newspapers if you prefer.) In another
picture two others are building the table of fives on the tagboard. In the third
a little fellow is building the table of nines on the buttonboard while his com-
panion waits for the game which will follow as soon as it is completed. In Miss
Hall's office there is a picture showing also children working with test cards,
strips, nailboards, peg boxes, etc. I will show you how to prepare and
use any of these that may seem desirable to work with in your group. Such oc-
cupations are more useful than class drill in helping the child to form true con-
cepts of the number series, and as they are really a form of quiet, social play,
the children enjoy them greatly, and can engage in them without fatigue for a
10 ARITHMETIC
much longer time than in ordinary class work or in games where the attention of
the whole class is demanded. Class exercises, whether work or play, should be
brief. Children have not the power of sustained attention, and it is worse than
useless to try to hold their attention after their stock of brain power is exhausted,
But in the occupations something is to be accomplished ; as, for instance, the mak-
ing of a "pretty chart." The creative joy is aroused, concentration follows, and
generally the children are not willing to stop until the thing is finished.
For that reason you will find it better to put the occupations in the latter
part of the period after the class exercises. In the case of quick pupils for whom
a particular class exercise is not necessary, it is well to leave them out of it and
give them an occupation, while you work with the slow ones, mind to mind. Your
best and brightest pupils are likely to become impishly troublesome if they are
held down to the pace of the slow. (Really one can't help thinking that they
have justification.) They have a right to advance at their own rate and it is
an easy matter for a teacher, whose day's lesson is well planned, to give to the
quick pupils an occupation such as written work or chart work or apparatus work
in which they are profitably employed, not merely occupied, but really learning.
Such children dislike what they call "baby work." "Give us something harder,"
they often say. "I've got something nice and hard to do today," said a little fellow
proudly showing his occupation. Arnold Bennett, an English writer, was
astonished to see children in New York "grabbing knowledge from their teach-
ers," as he expressed it. If you are successful in your teaching you will see your
pupils "grabbing knowledge" from you and from their mates. The little ones
often have sweeter ways of getting knowledge. When a little child comes to you
saying, perhaps with a gentle tug at your skirt or a soft touch on your hand,
"Please come show me about this," your first disengaged moment is the psycholog-
ical moment for giving him the knowledge he wants. Perhaps as you watch the lit-
tle worker you will feel an impulse to put your arms around him and give him a
little hug. But if you are wise you will nobly resist the impulse and will keep
to the easy, pleasant manner suitable to the schoolroom. However, if you feel
that impulse, it is probable that the teaching instinct, so nearly akin to the par-
ental instincts, is welling up in your mind and heart. This instinct for loving,
guiding and instructing the young, if reinforced by reason and good judgment, by
the study of your pupils and also of educational principles will bring you success
and happiness in your work. Then you will not become a tense, nerve-racked
schoolma'am or domineering, dreaded schoolmaster. Instead you will be a lov-
ing leader of children, guiding them into the realms of the world's knowledge.
I have emphasized the fact that slow pupils should not be prodded by blame.
Quick pupils should not be stimulated and make heady by praise. A child is no
more deserving of praise for being more capable that his mates than for being
taller or handsomer or having a better father and mother than his mates. These
are all matters of private congratulation but not of public praise. The fact is
that under those plans of teaching by which children were required to commit to
memory a certain number of facts in a certain time, whether they understood
them or not, praise and blame were stimuli used to force them into that very dis-
agreeable form of activity, to make them "get over the ground." Such stimuli
have no place in our scheme of things, where every child is to be given (or al-
lowed to help himself to) all that he can carry at the time without having any
dead weight of misconceived facts piled upon him. The quick, strong, success-
ful pupil should have as a reward for good work not praise, but quiet congratu-
lation and the opportunity of acquiring more knowledge. Perhaps the teacher
will say to him something like, "You got it, didn't you? Tomorrow you can try
this piece of work. It is still harder." Slow, weak, unsuccessful pupils should
have not blame, but sympathy, expressed more in manner than in words, recog-
nition of their small successes, and also sufficient help. They need frequent op-
portunities for steadying their minds against the stronger, clearer mind of the
teacher. They should have direct, personal instruction, lasting only a few mm-
OPEN LETTER n
utes, given when the need appears. The plan of giving your successful workers
special work while you help the unsuccessful, suggested on a previous page, cares
for both kinds of workers. Another way of caring for both kinds is to set them
to working together. For instance, if two pupils, one strong in his work and
the other weak, build the table of tens on the tagboard, working together, each is
helped by the other. Especially is the weak pupil helped by the strong. Of
course you understand that the building of the ten table is not an end in itself,
that it is merely a means of putting the children in contact with certain numbers
in a way that brings into their minds many vivid perceptions of the relations of
those numbers. Care must be taken to see that the strong pupils are fair in al-
lowing the others to have their full share in the occupation. In this way of work-
ing there are many beautiful chances of bringing out kindly feelings towards the
child who has missed work by absence or is in delicate health or is in special need
of kindness for any reason. Of course children are not angels and sometimes
complications arise from the clashings of the wills of the little people. In times
of peaceful activities the ideals of harmonious social work and play are held up,
but when conflicts arise, the teacher promptly takes practical measures for secur-
ing harmony by separating or perhaps segregating, for a time, those who "don't
play the game" with due consideration for others.
Educators generally agree that formal arithmetic is not suitable for children
of the first and second grades. For this reason it has been taken out of those
grades in many of the best schools. But number games and occupations, skill-
fully guided, are not only pleasing to little children, but rightly used, they lead to
a realization of numbers that cannot possibly be gained by the old-fashioned
routine drill and enforced tasks. Each game and occupation has a specific pur-
pose, is intended to lead the pupils to grasp some particular idea. The skillful
teacher knows definitely what result she wishes to obtain in giving it, just as
the skillful physician, administering a drug, knows the result he desires to ob-
tain by its use. All the games and occupations are carried on in
the most leisurely way, not only to prevent errors in the work but to pre-
vent the over stimulation of the children's minds and nervous systems. Awful
things used to be done to the nervous systems of children in schoolrooms be-
fore practical school work was influenced by the kindergarten movement and the
child study movement.
Queries: Who originated the kindergarten? Who is the leader of the child
study moz'cincnt in America?
Every day as the children come back to their happy social play with the
numbers they gain a clearer idea of them in their unchanging sequence. Gradu-
ally the mental picture of the series is formed and becomes a part of their mental
furnishings. They can call it up with more or less distinctness just as they call
up mental pictures of their homes or school. A child of six or seven who has
lived for sometime in a large, amply furnished home knows the forms, the loca-
tions and the names of hundreds of objects in the house. When sent to get a
piece of music lying on the piano he does not make the mistake of going into
the kitchen after it, because his mental picture of the interior of the house locates
the piano in a certain part of the parlor. No one has drilled him upon the names,
places and forms of the articles in the house. He has learned the forms and
places, without conscious effort, by contact with the objects often repeated. Ke
has learned their names by auditory contact, by hearing them often applied to
the objects. And so in our early games and occupations we put the child in con-
tact with numbers, in an agreeable way, in order that he may learn their names,
their places in the series, and the forms of their symbols. While gaining this
knowledge he is unconsciously learning many number facts, just as by his ordin-
ary play he learns without effort many important facts about this great complex
world in which he is an active and inquisitive newcomer. Conscious work and
drill come later. Just now, you know, I am writing to you about beginners mak-
ing their visualizations of the number series by means of plays and occupations.
12 ARITHMETIC
Learning To Let us go back to the first lesson. In connection with count-
Apply Number ing by sound and with chart work the young teacher is also
leading her pupils to realize number by counting objects.
The children have been in contact with objects all their short lives, but the idea of
number in connection with them, except "two" or perhaps "three," does not come
clearly to a child during the first few years. Then the number sense awakens and
gives him the new enjoyment of putting "the invisible band of number" around
things.
Miss Smith's pupils count shoepegs, button-molds, pencils, coins, inch-squares and
triangles made by cutting inch-squares diagonally. They count circles and half-circles.
These geometric forms are arranged in patterns. Sometimes the teacher suggests the pat-
terns, sometimes the children are allowed to use their own taste. The counting idea is al-
ways made prominent. Slips of paper upon which large dots are arranged in forms like
those on dominoes are given to them and they report the number of dots. (See page 12 of
state textbook for illustration.)
Groups of lines, horizontal, vertical or slanting are drawn on the board by the
teacher or by a pupil and the children tell how many lines in each group. They count the
desks or tables in their schoolroom. They find the number of pupils in the class. Some
day the teacher says, "Tomorrow I want you to tell me just how many steps you walked
upon when you came into the school building."
At another time they report the number of windows in a given side of a particular
building on the campus. Of course, not all of the children remember to count them, but
with the consent of the grade supervisor the class makes a pleasant little excursion out-
side and every child verifies the count of those who did remember.
It is not suggested to the pupils to count their fingers, and if they begin to do so,
Miss Smith quietly diverts their attention. She does not wish them to form the habit of
finger counting.
Not only things seen are counted but things heard and felt. The teacher taps on
the desk with a pencil and asks pupils to tell how many taps were given. Turning to a
pupil, she says, "Frank, you tap. Not more than five times." He gives four taps. "Now
two more," says the teacher. The class report.
At another time she says, "I am going to clap my hands. You tell me how many times
I clap them. Everybody look away from me." After the pupils have responded, she calls
on members of the class to clap their hands and allows the others to report the number of
times.
She sets them to marching around the room, saying, "Now you march until I say 'Halt,'
and then you must be able to tell how many steps you have taken."
She says to the class, "I want some one to come out here and
shut his eyes and see if he can tell how many shoepegs I put into
his hand." So uncertain are the reports of the untrained tactile sense that this
amounts to very little more than a guessing game. To prevent the class from getting con-
fused ideas, she is careful to have the child whisper to her the number of pegs that he
thinks he has in his hand. She writes the number and when the pegs are shown and the
real number found, the teacher merely says "Right," or "Wrong."
Your own invention will furnish you plays enough when you get into the
spirit of the thing. The only requirements for a good little number play are
that the children like it and that it teaches them something in the right way.
Plays in which the attention is not focused upon number, as in some boisterous
number games, are objectionable. "Choosing sides" is not to be recommended
because of the rivalries and jealousies it induces, and because as a result of these
rivalries the zest of the play depends upon the making of mistakes by the oppos-
ing side. The children listen eagerly for those mistakes and naturally all except
the clearest minded pupils get out of the play an uncertain mixture of errors and
corrections.
In the exercise just described a group of things was to be observed by the pupils
and they were required to tell "How many?" The reverse activity of giving to the pupils
a number and requiring them to select the corresponding number of things is used in many
ways. For instance the teacher or a pupil names a number and the class arrange on their
desks the indicated number of squares or circles or other objects.
The pupils "tap out" or "clap out" numbers which the teacher or a pupil has named.
Sometimes they play a "mum game" with numbers. Instead of naming a number
the teacher or a pupil writes it on the board or holds up a card upon which it is pasted.
The pupils tap it out; not a_word is spoken. A mum game, played not often and for only
a short time, makes for quiet and self control, but it lacks vitality. When M\?s, Smith
sees that the value of each number in the first decade is well sensed by the children, the
plays are dropped and the objects are put away.
OPEN LETTER 13
She uses a counting game a little more advanced called, "Flash." It is played with
squares (or circles) of which some are of a dark color and the others light. This game
is useful only for small groups. Miss Smith calls up three or four children who stand
around her as she sits. The remainder of the class are at the board writing numbers.
Their turn comes later. She has a boxlid into which she puts, perhaps, three dark squares
and two light ones. The children, with the exception of John, whose back is turned be-
cause he is to be the first to play flash, watch her and she consults them as to how many
squares shall go into the boxlid. When all is ready she says, "Flash, John." He turns,
looks quickly and reports, "Three dark and two light. Five."
It will be seen that here is a little anticipatory work for the learning of
combinations, the securing of a passing perception of the fact that three and two
are five. Drill upon such facts and enforced tasks upon them at this stage of
the learning process would be very harmful. The children need to stay in the
concrete some time longer. Probably some child will say with the air of a dis-
coverer, "Yes, three and two are always five." The wise teacher will smile en-
couragingly at this bit of generalization, the forerunner of many others, but she
will not yield to the temptation to drill the class upon it. There must be many
such spontaneous observations on the part of the children, much storing of their
subconsciousness with number facts, many resulting happy reports of their little
insights into number before they are ready for formal drill. Then they will wel-
come it as a help in fixing in their memories facts of which they feel themselves
to be the discoverers, but which, very much to their regret, they often lose. The
enforcement of tasks will not be necessary. Voluntary effort will take the place
of it in the case of children capable of learning.
Does all this seem to you impracticable, rather soft-hearted idealism? It is
not. On the contrary it is a bit of the most practical, hard-headed sort of think-
ing. It is not sentiment nor visionary idealism that prevents Luther Burbank
from tearing open rosebuds in order to get fine, full-blown roses. His practical
knowledge of the laws that govern those living organisms called plants leads him
instead to wait for their development, in the meanwhile protecting them from
force and keeping them in the most favorable conditions of soil and sun. And
it is practical knowledge of the laws governing the minds of children that leads a
teacher to wait for the natural, unforced development of the mathematical sense
of her pupils, keeping them in the meanwhile in the most educative environment
possible and in the sunshine of her loving expectancy. This is not a new theory.
It is centuries old. In the past its application has been hindered by many con-
ditions now disappearing under the new, strong demand for efficiency in school
work. In differing forms but with the same spirit the theory is applied also in
other lines of study here in the Training School. You would find it the country
over, wherever the schools are controlled by advanced educational thinking. Many
communities are "not yet ready" for that kind of control of their schools, but it
is only a question of time when they will be.
Running thru all the work here described, recurring again and again, ate
three ideas : Visualization, Voluntary Effort, and the Storing of the Subconscious
Mind.
The visualization of the number series secured by chart work and apparatus
work is useful merely as a stepping-stone to an accurate and ready knowledge of
number facts. This is the ideal towards which we are leading our pupils, a
knowledge of number so clear and strong that the mind seems to respond auto-
matically to any demands for number facts such as are used in ordinary calcula-
tion. For instance when the question comes, "How much is 7 times 8?" the well-
trained mind responds instantly, automatically as it were, with the correct answer.
It has become a matter of the reflexes, like walking.
In the learning of number facts there are two periods: first, the period of
nnsconcions learning by means of play and work with concrete material : second,
the period of conscious, voluntary work and play directed to the memorizing of
the required facts. There are forty-five combinations to be learned, such as "4
and 3 are ?," with the corresponding separations, as "4 and ? are 7." In other
14 ARITHMETIC
words, addition and subtraction. There are eleven multiplication tables each with
its eleven facts, and there are the correlative facts of the division tables. It is
no small task for children with their immature minds to perceive and fix in mem-
ory these three hundred and more number facts. It has been called an "insuff-
erably tedious task." Fear, hatred, and dread of the work have been supposed to
be the necessary accompaniments of the drudgery it involved. But now just
as you fortunate young people are coming into the profession, plans for adapting
the work to the capacity of the learner and for utilizing the play spirit are be-
coming general. As a result the fear, the hatred, and the dread are disappearing
and interest and pleasure appear. Some children become too much interested in
number work, just as some people become too much interested in solitaire, which
is after all merely a grown-up number game. Such children should not be
praised and pushed forward. After they have done a fair amount of daily work
in number their attention should be diverted to other interests.
In the beginning of the first period, the purpose of the teacher is to arouse
in her pupils a sense of the relations of numbers by means of play and work with
material, with charts, and with different kinds of apparatus. Most of the apparatus
used in our classes indicates number relations in the same way as the chart, but in
a more objective form. During this time children often show that ideas of the rela-
tions of numbers are forming in their minds, by their reports of their little discov-
eries made while using a chart or some piece of apparatus or while "thinking
about it at home." A child not yet six years old who had played with a chart a few
times called his aunt's attention to the second horizontal line of the chart and re-
marked, "All the numbers that have 2 at the end live on the same street." Little
ones sometimes show reflective thought by such questions as "Where do the num-
bers go after they get to 100?" or "What is the very biggest number in the whole
world ?" By means of the play and the work and the quiet, happy thinking dur-
ing this period the children are led to perceive the facts of number as a series
of related facts. This effects a great saving of time and effort in the later learn-
ing process, as compared with the plan of learning them as independent, arbi-
trary statements. If in studying geography a child should be set to learning a
great many separate, unrelated facts, such as, "Chicago is west of New York,''
"Denver is east of San Francisco," etc., without any map to show directions and
relative distances, if he simply memorized them as independent, arbitrary state-
ments, he might be drilled upon them for a very long time without getting a clear
idea of the situation of the places mentioned in these assertions. The facts would
be likely to slip out of his memory in the way expressed by one of our student
teachers last year when she said, "What I teach these children in the day they
forget in the night." Now the magnitude of a number is known by its place in
the number series. For an illustration let us think of the numbers 19 and 64.
From the fact that 19 comes earlier in the series than 64 we derive the idea that
it is less than 64. A child playing with charts, number squares, etc., soon gets
similar ideas, because on the chart the relations of numbers are shown by the
directions and distances of the printed numbers from one another. The chart
gives the same kind of help in the learning of number facts as that which is given
by a map in the learning of geography. For instance, a child in the playing stage
of number learning sees that 6, coming farther on in the series than 4, is a bigger
number, means more things than 4. As he becomes more definite in his thinking
he sees that 6 is just two steps beyond 4 or that "4 and two more are 6," and
that "4 and three more are 7." Soon he sees that 26 is just two steps beyond 24
or that "24 and two more are 26," and so on. Then he is thinking number in-
telligently. He is getting ideas of related facts to be used with clear percep-
tion and strong memorization in his later work. Hence the importance of this
first period of play and occupation. It is also important that this period should
come in the early grades while the child is forming his concepts of number, at the
time when his interest in number and his desire for childish play are naturally
strong.
OPEN LETTER 15
In the latter part of this period the pupils begin to acquire the power of
visualizing the number table on the chart, of intentionally "thinking how it looks."
At this time there is much quiet, ruminative thinking on the part of the successful
pupils. They have the visualized series at their command and they make many
observations upon it which they report in class. After the first decade is mastered
some one is almost sure to say, indicating the 10, 20, 30, etc., of the chart, "See,
the i, 2, 3, 4, run right along on the bottom line, too." As a little fellow in one
of last year's classes remarked, while working on the decades. "We are using
the same old figures right over again." When the eleven chart, given beloxv, is
first presented, usually some pupil exclaims, "The elevens all run down hill."
1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91
2 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 92
3 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83 93
4 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84 94
5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 85 95
6 16 26 36 46 56 66 76 86 96
7 17 27 37 47 57 67 77 87 97
8 18 28 38 48 58 68 78 88 98
9 19 29 39 49 59 69 79 89 Q Q
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
When the nine chart appears they are ready to see that the multiples of nine
"run up hill." The spontaneous, undemanded expressions of the pupils in regard
to their work are pretty good indications of the vitality and success of your own
efforts in teaching.
As you have been in Prof. Baker's classes and have studied his manual, you
know the value he places upon correct mental picturing at this stage of the work.
The usefulness of these mental pictures is also clearly recognized in a recent book,
The Teaching of Arithmetic, by Dr. A. W. Stamper of the Chico Normal School.
In this visualizing work it is the aim of the teacher to make her pupils ab-
solutely independent of all concrete aids to thinking. Gradually she leads them
from the use of the chart to the use of mental imagery. "I wish I had a chart
like this, at home. Then I could reckon anything I wanted to," said a boy in
the second grade, beginning number. "You don't need it," replied the teacher.
"You will soon have one in your head." Her prophecy came true. In a few
months the boy was able, while standing with his back to the chart, to answer
such questions as "How many are 96 and 3?" "50 and 20?" He answered these
as correctly, tho not as quickly, as he would have answered the question "How
many windows are there in your mother's kitchen?" and by the same process,
that of forming a mental picture.
I hope it is clear to you that this visualizing stage in which the learner brings
up a mental picture of the number series and upon it counts out facts just as he
formerly counted them out on the chart, is only a passing phase of the learning
process. It is intermediate between the counting on the chart and the quick,
16 ARITHMETIC
sure knowing of the required number facts. After that is reached there is no
need of visualizations of the number series. If any exist they lie unused in the
background of consciousness, just as the mental picture of the typewriter key-
board, so necessary at first, is unused by the typist after she becomes expert. But
while the child is in the visualizing stage we must see to it that his mental pic-
tures are correct and vivid. There are several little exercises designed to secure
good visualizations, which I will show you in your classrooms. None of them,
however, are as effective as the simple device of keeping a plainly written number
chart always on the board in convenient range of the pupils' sight. The silent,
unremitting instruction, sent by the chart into the minds of the pupils when-
ever they chance to turn their eyes towards it, greatly shortens the time and
effort necessary for the conscious learning of number. As Prof. Baker expresses
it, the children are "exposed" to mathematical truth. Much is absorbed by their
impressionable minds, and it is stored in the subconsciouness.
The second period of number learning, that in which the child is con-
sciously acquiring the knowledge of number facts that is to serve him the rest
of his life, lasts two or three years. At this time the purpose of the teacher is
to help her pupils to become so prompt and accurate in their responses to num-
ber questions that their mental action seems to be automatic. The time in which
this power of reflex response to demand for number facts can be acquired dif-
fers greatly in individuals. It cannot be shortened by outside force as that
only produces bewilderment. Hence the need of waiting for the individual
ability to develop. Some children, not well equipped by nature, can not be-
come quick and accurate in number work except at an expense of time and effort
greatly disproportionate to its value. For them the "minimum essentials" mast-
ered and managed in their own slow way are all that are feasible. The power
to reckon quickly and accurately is soon lost by disuse just as facility in piano-
playing or in typewriting is soon lost when practice stops. Of course it may
be regained by renewed practice. This power of ready response to number
questions can never be gained by a learner whose perceptions of number facts
are vague or incorrect. Hence the importance of vivid and accurate presenta-
tions of those facts.
There is a theory well known to educators, the theory of "brain patns,"
given by Prof. William James in his great work, Principles of Psychology. He
presented it as a hypothesis used to coordinate many known facts about the
way in which people learn. Psychologists agree that all of our thinking is ac-
companied by motion of the molecules of certain cells in our brains, and that this
motion passes along from one cell to another. Hence the name "path." In the
light of this theory we shall see that it is our bounden duty to insist, from the
beginning and all thru the work, upon absolute correctness, secured by slow,
clear perceptions and by careful expression. According to this theory the first
time a child thinks, "5 and 3 are 8," he starts a brain path. Every repetition of
that fact deepens and smooths the path, as it were, and makes the recalling of
the fact more easy and swift, until after many repetitions the action of the brain
centers involved becomes reflex. But if he makes the statement that 5 and 3
are something else than 8, or hears it made by his mates, a new, diverging brain
path is made, along which impulses are likely to travel whenever the question
is asked, "How many are 5 and 3 ?" Uncertainty begins, uncertainty that some-
times lasts until the pupil has reached high school work, as many, many teach-
ers besides myself can sadly testify. To prevent this uncertainty, or any kind of
mistaken thinking about number facts, it will be necessary for you to insist that
every child, when in doubt, shall take the truth at once from the visible number
series of the chart, without giving time for any wrong impulses to play thru
his brain. We say to our pupils. "If you think mistakes when you are little it
will hurt your brains and make you stupid in arithmetic when you get older,
and if you say mistakes out loud you will hurt the other children's brains." This is
exactly true, and we find it very effective in arousing in the pupils' minds a strong
OPEN LETTER 17
aversion to mistakes. In this way the "storing of the subconsciousness" with
errors can be prevented to a certain extent. Of course it will be impossible for
you or anyone else to prevent it entirely.
When the work of memorization goes on successfully the interest heightens.
The joy of acquisition is aroused in the children. They rejoice in the possession
of their bits of number knowledge as the miser counting his coins, rejoices in his
possessions. They express their feelings in such remarks as, "I know the even
numbers and I know the table of tens and I know a lot of the fives." Sometimes
they ask for drill for some particular purpose. For instance, a child who wants
to get more fives or to keep what she has got will perhaps ask the teacher for a
class drill upon the table of fives. It is a useful plan to have the pupils make in
class little books in which they write the number facts that they are sure
they know. These little books, made by folding a few sheets 6f paper,
and' having a title like, ''My First Number Book," should of course be as neatly
made as possible. When filled they may have a cover decorated according to
the fancy of the owner or the taste of the teacher. They should be exactly true
in their contents. For this reason the pupils should put into the books only a
very few facts at a time and those should be facts upon which they have "stood
test" several times. Of course the teacher will carefully examine the books to
see that no errors creep in. If any are found the teacher should erase them
without mentioning them. In the next class period she will question the pupil
about the fact, and when she is satisfied that he has it clearly in mind she will
allow him to put the statement of it in the vacant space.
My dear students, in this letter many topics are touched upon, ranging from
playthings to psychological theories, and I know that many of the ideas will not
be clear to you until they have been elaborated in your professor's classroom
and in our weekly conferences or until they have been worked out in your own
classrooms. If you will read again, and as a continuous story, the descriptive
work printed in small type, you will see that it merely covers, in sketchy outline,
the learning of the three first essentials mentioned on page 3, the sound series,
the sight series, and their use in applying number to objects. Next comes the
understanding of the decimal notation with its recurrences and repetitions, and
along with it the writing of numbers beyond 100. It is not worth while to
present any more descriptions in this letter to you, because a few minutes of
demonstration work, such as I hope to give in your classrooms from time to
time, will help you more than dozens of pages of description of it, besides being
much easier for you, and for me. The book which I am writing about the happy
learning of mathematics, a copy of which I hope to place in our library in the
course of a year or two, contains a great deal of description of schoolroom
activities. It is not the purpose of this letter to give you a set of pedagogical
devices. Its aim is to lead you to think intelligently about the principles, pur-
poses, and reasons for procedure, that underlie the work. Plans, methods,
devices, apparatus, all avail little or nothing unless the true spirit and under-
standing are in the teacher. When these come to you and with them the skill
to adapt the work to your own classes you will find many plans useful to you in
books, and especially in school journals.
The learning of the facts and processes of addition, subtraction, multipli-
cation, and division is the principal work of the third and fourth grades. Dur-
ing this time the pupils are also forming clear, elementary ideas of multiples,
factors, fractions, ratios, measurements, and geometric forms as presented in the
drillbook used in the third grade. They are also learning something about the
applications of numbers in daily life. As soon as they have a few number tacts
they begin to use them in number stories. (See page 29 of state textbook for
illustration.) They play store, count money, and make change. They report
actual purchases that they have made. Suppose Hugh has bought a pencil, cost-
ing 5 cents. The class may tell the different coins used in making change if a
quarter was offered in payment or a half dollar, or a dollar. Care must be taken
18 ARITHMETIC
that the children do not make disclosures of family affairs in their eagerness to
report actual buyings in which they are interested. Other applications of number
may be drawn from their work in manual training, in construction, and in other
departments, but the main stress should be laid upon the direct memorizing of facts.
This is to be enlivened by many number games which will be shown to you.
No formal analysis, no problems requiring the consideration of "steps," should
be given at this time. This is the time when the perceptive and retentive powers
are to be used, not the powers of formal, abstract reasoning. In the training of
children for circus performers the exercises are carefully adapted to their powers.
Apart from considerations of humanity the trainers are unwilling that a child
should be overtrained or made fearful, as that would probably prevent him from
becoming a fine adult performer. Long ago Pres. Eliot pointed out the fact that
if children are to become clear-thinking mathematicians in their later years of
learning, they must not be given, in their early years, exercises that involve be-
wilderment and struggle. Many of the failures in the higher grades are due to this
cause. Many pupils enter those grades who, instead of having a clear knowledge
of number which they can use in connection with the reasoning processes, have an
abounding hatred of it as the chief result of their early unsuccessful struggles with
the subject.
In the pre-memorizing period of working with the combinations the child has
them all before him on the chart, and he uses them in various ways ; as in the exer-
cise of "telling combinations", in which each child has his turn in selecting com-
binations from the chart or, if he is very sure of himself, from his mind. But when
the work of memorizing begins, the combinations are not to be presented in a hap-
hazard way. Instead, a few are selected and they are thoroughly learned and
presented as a stunt by each child. Games, drills, tests, boardwork, bookwork, all
bear upon the set of combinations which is being considered. In this way the
desire of the pupils to acquire it is aroused. And their desire is the great im-
pelling force in all this zvork.
The first set of combinations consists of those of the even numbers. It is
preceded by counting by twos, and by games with even numbers. Let me caution
you, if you want to avoid mix-ups, don't use the word "odd" in connection with
the odd numbers at this time. The numbers are even or not even. Months later
when the distinction is clear in the minds of the children, it will be safe to use the
word "odd". When pupils are able to add 2 to any even number that they can see
on the chart or can think of, they practice adding 10 to even numbers as well as 2.
It is easy to add 10 on the chart, as it requires only a move to the right on the
horizontal line, a fact which the pupils soon discover. 4 is taken next. They then
have the three numbers, 2, 10, and 4, which they use as addends with other even
numbers. They naturally want more. 6 is given to them and they are set to ring-
ing the changes of these four numbers upon the even numbers. When they are
expert in this, they take 8. This completes the first set of combinations. Then
come the corresponding separations. The use of flash cards, of test cards, and
much written work is needed. Column addition of even numbers and the addition
of two numbers in the thousands, all of whose digits are even numbers, are used
at this time. Keen-minded children soon discover a law which one expressed as
follows : "If you add an even number to another even number you will get an even
number, and if you keep on, you will always get even numbers. The other num-
bers are not so." A little girl remarked, "The other numbers are just put in between
the even numbers to hold them together." Upon this a boy said that he thought
"they were put there to keep the even numbers apart." The teacher could not
decide, but she was greatly pleased with these comments because they showed that
the attention of the children was focused upon the even numbers, which was just
where she wanted it to be at that particular time. When the class has stopped
blundering or doubting on this set of combinations and separations, it is ready for
the second set. Probably some individuals, who got ready before the class in gen-
eral, are already preparing stunts in advance.
OPEN LETTER 19
The second set consists of the combinations that make the even numbers thru
18, group combinations, as 4 equals 2 and 2, and also 3 and i, etc. I hope that
those of you who have this work this year will remind me to give you the game
"How many?"
The third set includes all the other combinations ; that is, the groups that make
the odd numbers thru 17.
It will take many months for the pupils to master the combinations and sep-
arations. If the teacher hurries and crowds the work, the pupils will become con-
fused in their thinking and it will take many more months. It is a common mis-
take of inexperienced teachers to suppose that when a pupil has recited a fact he
will continue to know it. The first learning is always temporary memorization,
scarcely more than perception. There must be many repetitions of it at different
times before the brain path is worn deep enough to be permanent.
I do not believe that you are able to tell what combination of foods composed
your dinner a week ago last Thursday. You had a vivid knowledge of it at the
time. All your senses reported it to you. (Observe that in learning number only
visual, auditory, tactile, and motor impulses are involved.) But I venture to say
that your knowledge, vivid as it was at the time, has proved to be only a "tem-
porary memorization." If you were to have the same combination of foods at
many meals, your memorization of them would be more lasting, its permanence
depending upon the number of the repetitions.
Query: V/liat does this illustration suggest to you?
During the months in which the facts of addition and subtraction are the cen-
tral thought of the work, the facts and processes of multiplication and division are
also being comprehended and to some extent memorized. The multiplication tables
are taken in the following order: tens, twos, fives, elevens, nines, threes, eights,
fours, sevens, sixes, twelves. The reasons for this order will appear in the work.
They are too lengthy to be given here.
It is a fact well known to teachers of mathematics that pupils can carry on
two or more lines of activity at the same time without becoming confused, pro-
vided that one does not depend upon another. For instance, if we were to intro-
duce the second set of combinations before the first was mastered, confusion would
result ; but when we allow the pupils to work on a multiplication table, it does not
interfere with the learning of the combinations and it is a pleasing bit of advance.
A day's lesson, which lasts forty minutes in these grades, may include, besides
combinations, work and play with a multiplication table and with geometric forms
in which doubling, halving, and otherwise varying the forms is a feature. On
another day simple ratios will be presented. The pupils can see from the chart
that 10 is one half of 20, just as one column is one half of two equal columns.
When the ideas of one third, one fourth, etc. are grasped in the work with geomet-
ric forms, the fact that 10 is one third of 30, one fourth of 40, and so on is equally
clear. The day's lesson should usually include a little new work carefully adapted
to the children's comprehension. As an opposite kind of activity, some snappy
work for speed, judiciously used, is helpful and enjoyable. It must not be carried
to the point of over excitement. The last twenty minutes of the period is de-
voted to written work from the book. Then is the teacher's opportunity to call to
her some pupil who needs a few minutes of help. Perhaps there is a boy who is
"a problem," indifferent, careless, out of harmony. As he stands by the teacher's
knee, as he would by that of his mother or father, and receives the friendly help,
he may become interested, perhaps softened by the mind-to-mind contact over the
work. It is worth trying.
About plans. You know, of course, that a teacher who goes before her class
without a definite purpose to teach some particular thing or without tentative plans
for teaching it, is a failure from the start, just as your dressmaker or tailor would
be if attempting to make a suit for you without having definite plans for it. Your
daily plans should be made on the day before they are used. For instance, in your
preparation period on Monday, while Monday's lesson and its immediate results
20 ARITHMETIC
are still fresh in your mind, think over the plans for the next day's lesson, select
the exercises that you propose to use and make a list of them. Have this list for
the day on your table, where it may be consulted by the grade supervisor and my-
self when we enter your room. We trust that it will be read occasionally by the
principal and by the head of the mathematics department, who are also interested
in your work.
Instead of a written plan for the coming week please hand to me at the
weekly meetings a written report of what you have done in the past week and
the results of it as far as you are able to determine.
As soon as you have decided upon the seating of your group, please make a
diagram of it, giving the full names of the pupils in the order in which they sit
and your own name and grade. Hand this to me at your first opportunity.
In your few weeks of practice study in the Normal you are working under
favorable conditions created especially to enable you to learn the ways in which
children's minds react under teaching. Many of the responsibilities which will be
yours in your future work in the schoolroom, here devolve upon your super-
visors. In order that we may be helpful to you and may protect your pupils
from any harm that might come to them from the unguided efforts of inex-
perienced teachers, it is necessary for us to know your work as closely as possible.
As your success means the success of the children and also our success, many
earnest and kind wishes are centered upon you.
With pleasant anticipations of our work together, I am
Your sincere friend and co-worker,
ADELIA R. HORNBROOK.
San Jose, Cal., Sept., 1913.
ERRATA FOR "OPEN LETTER"
Page 4, 47th line, 5th word, "deficiencies."
Page 10, 39th line, 8th word, "made."
Page 19, 1st line, "rest of the" should be between the 6th and the 7th
word.
III.
THE FIRST FIVE YEARS
OF ARITHMETIC
Second Letter From a Supervisor
Copyright, 1914, By Adelia R. Hornbrook.
MY DEAR STUDENT TEACHERS :
It is important that each of you shall understand the general course of in-
struction of which your term's work is a component part. This chapter contains
a brief outline of the number play and work of the first two years and of the
more formal work of the three succeeding years at the end of which the ele-
mentary state textbook is completed. It also contains many suggestions for work
which heretofore have been given orally.
First Twenty minutes a day are given to number play consisting of occu-
Year pations with simple apparatus, plays, and games. The general purposes
of the first year activities are to lead the child to know the sequences and values
of the first hundred numbers, to give him motive and opportunity to perceive and
use many independent number facts, to help him to memorize the combinations
whose sum is 10 or less, and to enable him to read and write numbers as far as
thousands.
As the opportunity for voluntary effort is always open to the children some
of them learn and present as "stunts'" much more than others. At the end of
each term the classes are sectioned so that the quick pupils are in one group and
the slow are in another, no idea of inferiority or superiority being attached to
either set of pupils. If you are put in charge of a section of slow pupils, you will
have the opportunity to use much sympathy, watchfulness, and ingenuity. It
is often the case that the "slow" pupil is merely the unawakened. If the awak-
ening of the mathematical sense comes while he is under your care, you will
have the pleasure of assisting in rapid and happy development.
In the "Open Letter" which forms the preceding chapter of this manual some
beginnings of the plays, occupations and games of the first year are described.
(See pp. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 13.) These descriptions are given as a basis for
your work. Follow them closely at first until your teaching sense begins to de-
velop. Then vary the plans to suit the occasions that arise.
Each exercise has its specific purpose. For instance, such plays as "hunt-
ing", "hiding", and "letting out" numbers, described on pages 7 and 9, are de-
signed to teach the child how to read numbers. They also help him to realize
the value of numbers by fixing in his mind their places in the series, as shown
in the chart.
For the beginning work desk charts are to be prepared, one for each child.
(See description p. 8.) In the IB grade, only the first decade should be writ-
ten in the desk charts. The second is added after the first is learned, and so on.
Keep a large chart of fives always upon the board. The other apparatus must
be prepared when needed, except tagboard, buttonboard, nailboard, decade sticks,
abacus, etc., which are furnished by the school.
In all grades each teacher before beginning work should place her plan for
the day's lesson upon the supervisor's desk and should see that all the material
required in it is at hand. It is as absurd for a teacher to go before her class with
only her voice for a tool as it would be for a carpenter to attempt to work with
only his fingers, having neglected to bring his tools. Among the tools of the
teachers of the first and second grades are charts, number squares, crayons, eras-
21
22 ARITHMETIC
ers, pencils, paper, large cards with figures for tracing, small cards with figures
for games, cards with domino spots, flash cards, buttonstrings, dissected charts,
rulers, rolls of ribbon paper, objects for counting and combining, as squares, cir-
cles, semicircles, triangles, star points, leaves of trees (especially the peppertree),
toothpicks, buttonmolds, shoenails, etc. Charts, crayon and erasers are akuays
needed. From the others the teacher should choose a sufficient number of those
needed to carry out the plan of the day's work.
Fresh air is so important in the schoolroom and our soft climate allows
us to obtain it so easily that your first care upon entering your classroom, what-
ever may be your grade, should be to see that your windows are rightly adjusted.
Definite plans and an abundance of material, altho they are essential,
are not enough to insure success. I have seen in the classroom most dreary, per-
functory, futile exercises which were sincerely intended for number play by the
mistaken young teacher who carried them on. She had her plan and her material
but at least two great essentials for success were lacking in her mind. The first,
was the play spirit. Without the spirit of play all this number play is worse
than useless. ''How can I get the play spirit?" do you ask? It can be acquired
in various ways. Watch children at play and try to interpret their actions, play
with them, recall your own childish plays and feelings, talk with those who play
with children successfully, as kindergartners and playground supervisors. Read
books and articles upon the subject. For your immediate purposes when you are
appointed to a number play section, if you take into your classroom the plays
suggested in this manual and shown in the supervisor's meetings and enter into
them wholeheartedly, watching the children, thinking about them, trying to in-
terpret their feelings, you will find the spirit of play coming to you. It is natural
for children to love to play. And it is just as natural for women and for many
men to love to play with children.
There must also be in the mind of the teacher clear ideas of numbers in
their relations to one another and a strong desire to lead her pupils to realize
certain bits of number knowledge by means of the happy, purposeful play. This
desire will lead her to watch the actions of her pupils' minds and to devise means
for reaching them. She will strive to adjust the play to the needs of every little
member of her flock.
Every term I watch with delight the development of teaching power in
students who, after a period of apparent daze and weak, uncertain effort, catch
the spirit of the play, and as they grasp its underlying purposes become so filled
with desire, determination and expectancy for their pupils' happy learning that
not only is the success of the pupils assured but their own. As I write, a mental
picture of a scene in the classroom of one of these successful young teachers
comes before me. She was a quiet, soft-voiced woman. There was no affected
sweetness nor forced jollity in her manner. She was deeply interested in her
work and acted naturally. In her directions to her class she was clear, confident
and exact. She did not harangue her children, nor shout orders at them, nor ex-
hort them to "be good" or "pay attention." As I entered the room one day she
was sitting at one side of the large table with the children. They were playing
with the abacus. (Ordinarily an abacus has twelve rows of beads, but ours have
been made to correspond with the chart by clipping the beads from two of the
wires.) She was carrying the children's attention in an easy way. She was not
discouraged by the lapses of the little brains. She merely led the wandering at-
tention back to the desired point by directly and pleasantly including the inat-
tentive little one in the play. In the course of it a boy, whom I will call John,
announced, "When you have ten beads on the abacus and take ten more you have
twenty, just like the chart. When you have ten numbers on the chart and then
ten more you have twenty." He made his meaning clear by showing the first
two decades on the chart and pointing out the 20. "Did all of you hear what
John said?" asked the teacher. "Tell it again, John." John told it again more
definitely and with more delight than before.
FIRST FIVE YEARS 23
The teacher had planned other things for that lesson, but like the wise
little woman that she was, she seized the opportunity thus given. She led the
class into a discussion of ''what John found out." They showed on their desk
charts the fact that 2 tens make 20. John proudly handled the abacus, that
privilege being the natural reward of the discoverer. It was developed also that
3 tens are 30, and that 4 tens are 40, (''Don't you see the 4 in the 40?" was
asked,) and so on. Not all the children grasped the idea that day but it got into
their mental atmosphere. Sooner or later as the subject came up they all realized
the facts and hence remembered them in a way impossible to them if they had
been set to memorizing the table as a mere patter of words.
When a child sees for himself that the 3 in 30 means 3 tens, that 6 tens are
6-ty, 7 tens are 7-ty, etc., then (and not until then) is he ready to drop the use
of the concrete and to take up with ease the conscious learning of the multiplica-
tion table of tens. "Standing the test" upon this table and later upon other
tables are achievements in which children take much rightful pride.
Note carefully that what is meant by the "table of tens", as presented to be-
ginners, is the series of statements, "i ten is 10," "2 tens are 20," etc.
To the children each ten is an entity, a ten of beads on the abacus or a ten of
circles on their table or of numbers on the chart. A statement about 5 tens has
for them as concrete a basis as a statement about 5 sticks. The reversed ten
table, "10 times I are 10," "10 times 2 are 20," etc., does not deal with tens.
It deals with ones, twos, threes, etc. This reversed ten table is of course neces-
sary to be known, and we lead up to it by a gradual process of reversing the
known facts of one table so as to correlate it with the others, or as we call it in
the classes, by "finding old friends" in a new table. In all grades where the chil-
dren are learning the tables of multiplication and of division, teachers should
be sure that they are using the table for which the children's concrete work has
prepared them ; otherwise the repetition of the statements becomes mere word
patter.
I know that you are handicapped in the number play by the fear that
the discipline of your room will not be satisfactory. But your department super-
visors are eager to have the children led into knowledge of number by organized,
well-directed play. They comment happily and enthusiastically upon the suc-
cess of those student teachers that accomplish it. It is necessary to distinguish
between the informal play by which children learn number, and the formal dis-
cipline by which they enter and leave the room, or execute any concerted move-
ments. This formal discipline is not only a necessity in the managing of class-
es of children but, rightly used, it is a great benefit to the children individually
in many ways. One has only to look at a West Point graduate to see some of
the physical benefits of discipline. The personal and social ideals inculcated hi
quiet, prompt, orderly, concerted action in the schoolroom are of great value.
You can get this discipline by first finding out just what it ought to be and then
insisting upon it from the first in a kind, absolutely decided way, taking if for
granted that you have the sweet obedience and cooperation of your pupils in
"doing things right." You must be able to pass at will from formal discipline
to informal play and back again. Without this foundation of discipline, the de-
tails of which you must get as soon as possible from the department supervisors,
the play becomes wild and purposeless, very tiring to the children (and teacher),
and doing more harm than good to their number sense. Observe and use from
the first the signal by which a child signifies his readiness to speak, the "po-
sition". This is for several reasons a great improvement upon the old plan of
raising hands.
All the plays are very simple and are based upon well-known psycholog-
ical principles which it is not necessary to discuss here. They make varied ap-
peals to the senses and to the capacities of the child. He not only hears, he sees,
feels, handles, constructs, chooses, counts, measures, draws, matches and ad-
24 ARITHMETIC
justs, observes, discovers and reports, gives "stunts", keeps scores and reports
them, tells stories and comments upon those of his mates, dramatizes, in short,
uses his mind, his body and the number series in many interesting ways. And
thru it all he has the joy of acquisition, of feeling that he is getting knowledge
of number, that wonderful thing that grown-ups seem to know so much about
and that will help him to be like them when he learns it. None of the plays are
boisterous altho there is much movement, sometimes rhythmic, as in point-
ing and counting, or marching and singing, and sometimes free, as when the
children walk over to the corners of the table and count out for themselves the
number of circles or triangles or other pieces needed for the patterns which they
are making. This is much better than having them sit passively while you pass
out the pieces, provided that the children are quiet and polite. It is well to tell
them that this nice way of getting the pieces can only be used in rooms where
the children are polite. It is well to mention the same thing casually to some
grown person (as for instance a supervisor) in the presence of the children.
Absolute accuracy is insisted upon as an essential part of the plays. (See
the story of Tom, p. 5, also theory of "brain paths", p. 16.) It is vastly better
for children to be playing outside than to be in the classroom learning false state-
ments about numbers. And if they are allowed to make errors and to hear them
they will learn untrue statements. Of course you will not repeat an error nor
call attention to it. Quickly and emphatically substitute the fact.
Among plays suitable for first grade pupils are Matching Numbers on the
chart ; Having Numbers Dance ; Locating Numbers ; Counting and Pointing on
the chart by tens, or by fives or twos ; Building Tens on the table with number
squares, or blank squares, circles, semicircles or triangles ; Building Tens with
tags on the decade sticks, or on the tagboard, or with buttons on the button-
board, with beads on the abacus, or with nails on the nailboard. After all these
building occupations the game of "Telling Which" is useful, because it causes
definite perceptions of the places occupied by different numbers in the series and
leads to clear visualizations. When the desk charts become slightly worn they
are replaced by new ones and the old charts are cut into strips each showing
a decade. Putting these decades together in their original form is one way of
Building a Hundred. Again the old charts are cut into strips each showing
five numbers. These strips are used to build a hundred. Or the charts are cut
into twos with which to build twenty or thirty or fifty, as the children may be
able in the given time. Some multiple of 10 is always chosen as the limit of the
building. After a time the system of decimal notation seems to dawn upon the
children. Then they are ready for new ideas and new plays to lead up to them.
Running to a Number, begun in the first grade, is used with adaptations in
the first five grades. This begins with "creeping." For instance, the teacher
directs the children to put their left forefingers upon 3 on their desk charts.
"Count on four," she says. With the left finger still on 3 they count and point
out with the right the next four numbers and report "7." They hold the rigDt
finger upon the 7 until another addend is given. Then the left finger is brought
forward in the counting and pointing and is placed upon the number reported.
And so on until a desired number is reached. The teacher uses "Count on" and
"Add" interchangeably until the former is dropped. Soon the children are able
to count without pointing out each number. Then the small fingers no longer
"creep" but "walk" over the chart. Later when the children have learned the
distances and directions of the respective numbers the fingers "run", occasionally
"jumping", as when ten or some multiple of ten is added. The children take
turns acting as leaders in giving addends. But first the teacher leads, usually
carrying- some one idea thru the exercise. Perhaps she begins with 6, adds 4,
then 6, then 4 and so on until some child sees and reports, "I don't have to count.
When you add 4 to a number that has 6 at the end it always brings you down to
the end of the decade where there is a 0." Of course he is invited to show the
"easy way" to his classmates. Some of them see it at once. Perhaps some slow-
FIRST FIVE YEARS 25
minded little one will report the same thing some time afterward with great
delight, believing it to be his own discovery. Such a belated perception is
warmly welcomed by the teacher when it does come.
To give a foretaste of subtraction the teacher directs the children to "run
backward" on the chart. Then she sends them forward again, giving such direc-
tions as "Put finger on 5. Tell how many you must add to reach 8."
Later the pupils "run to numbers" on the wall chart. In the succeeding
grades, after the mental picture of the number series is distinct (See p. 15),
they run "in their minds". Still later when they reach the stage of automatic
knowing, towards which all this childish but clear and happy perception work
is designed to lead (See p. 13), the exercise has become for them, really ac-
curate and rapid addition and subtraction. Other ways of anticipating addition
and subtraction are by means of various plays with tagboard, buttonboard, etc.
To make the pupils familiar with the combinations that make 10 is the pur-
pose of several of the early plays. The "parting game", plays with the button-
string, "fishing for tens", and the game "How many?" are among those used
to give practical ideas of group combinations, not only of 10. but later of other
numbers. The footrule is also used in finding group combinations.
When your pupils play these games quickly and surely, prepare a set of test-
ing cards and call for volunteers to "stand test" upon the combinations that make
10. Then the separations. Keep records. Later let them try the combinations
of other numbers. Remember that in every test "the first mistake spoils the
stunt".
In "Making Patterns" definite numbers of geometric forms, as circles, half-
circles, squares, triangles, rhombuses, etc., are combined into regular figures
either copied or original, the number idea being made prominent.
The time during which the digits are presented (See pp. 7 and 8), should
be at least three months. As the children learn to make the figures correctly,
the making of charts upon the board or upon squared paper becomes a useful
and pleasing occupation. After the pupils know the first hundred numbers and
yon think that they are ready for larger ones, if you will place a tag showing 25
over the two naughts on the 100 tag, usually some one will be able to read the
125 for you. If there is little or no response, wait a few weeks before trying it
again. Do not let any one say "One hundred and twenty-five." Omit the "and."
The children play with even numbers in many ways. They march and count
by twos, sing the even numbers, sort out even numbers written on cards, group
objects in pairs and report the number of pairs, make two-charts with the first
thirty numbers, play the game, "Hunting Even Numbers," in which two chil-
dren go to corners of the room and hide their eyes while the rest select an even
number for them to find from hints given them, or the game in which they "fish
for even numbers." Running to numbers stepping only on the evens, is a use-
ful exercise. Plays with even numbers have many variations but they all have
the same purpose to focus the child's thought upon the even numbers to the ex-
clusion of the others during this time of preparation for the later work of learn-
ing the first set of C9mbinations and the table of twos. Hence in playing with
even numbers the odd numbers are never intentionally mentioned.
Gradually the children begin to remember some of the facts which they are
perceiving and reporting in their plays. Then they are ready for the exercise,
"Giving Number Facts". The phase of development in which children are eager
to give out number facts which they have subconsciously stored, appears usually
in the 1A or 2B grade. At first the teacher writes upon the board the facts
given by the children, thus showing them the correct ways of writing their be-
loved fact?. Soon, however, they write them upon the board, upon paper and in
little blank books made by folding a sheet of foolscap. Filling a Number Fact
Book is a fine occupation for those who are ready for the work. When the
teacher sees an error on the board, she erases it and sets the pupil to verifying
26 ARITHMETIC
his fact by "counting it out" on his chart. Papers containing errors are not re-
turned to the pupils. When the teacher finds a mistake in a number fact book
she erases it, or if it is written in ink she cuts it out.
Second Number play and number work go on in a leisurely way thru the
Year second grade, twenty minutes a day being spent upon it. The play
is lessened as its purposes are attained. The work is increased, but it is always
adjusted to the stage of "readiness" of the class. The early occupations give way
to such interesting exercises as working examples, applying numbers to geomet-
ric forms, discovering the fractional parts of surfaces, lines, solids, and num-
bers. The general purpose is to lead the pupils to memorize the first set of com-
binations and separations (those of the even numbers), and the tables of tens,
fives, twos and elevens, and to learn to read and write numbers to millions.
There are usually some children in a class whose mental age is beyond that
of their mates. A child of seven may have the mental power of an ordinary child
of ten. Such children must not be held down to the work of their mates which
they already know but must be allowed to learn and present as much as the time
permits. Their work is not only a joy to themselves but it is an inspiration to
their mates. In forming the habit of independent, advancing work they are lay-
ing the foundation of later success. While the teacher should not stimulate them
she should give them from time to time the bits of information which they may
need. This applies in all grades.
Giving number facts is an important exercise in the 2B grade. The chil-
dren get their facts from the chart or from their mental pictures of it and from
one another. Sometimes a child presents a particularly enormous fact about which
he says " I got it from papa." (Of course you will look out for the weak ones and
see that every one has some fact to present.) The little people like to deal with
large numbers. Hence it becomes necessary to show them how to read and write
thousands, and later millions. The Million Stick and the metal numbers are used
for these purposes. Most pupils are eager to take up "easy ways" of getting num-
ber facts. For instance, they see that 10 can be added to any number without
counting, by "just going straight across to the next decade". The teacher shows
them such facts as that in adding 7 to 40, instead of finding 40 on the chart and
counting on seven numbers to 47, as they have been accustomed, they can just
put a 7 in the place of the o in the 40. Quick pupils see at once this short way
of adding numbers less than ten to the multiples of ten, and the subject is brought
up from time to time until all grasp the idea. Doubling Numbers and its com-
plement, Halving Even Numbers, furnish many facts. When a child knows
from his own experience that 5 and 5 are 10, it is not difficult for him to see that
5 is one half of 10. If you have the children place on their desks an odd number
of circles, as five, and tell them to find half of the circles it will be interesting to
see how many of them grasp the idea of halving a number that is not even.
Be sure to put the results of such trials into your weekly report.
Column addition, the addition of numbers in the thousands, working with-
out the chart, and other "grown-up" ways of dealing with numbers are very pleas-
ing to the little learners at this stage. Addition with "carrying" is so desirable
an accomplishment that sometimes they get it from their elders at home. Before
they have learned carrying, it is necessary to use for addends only those numbers
in which the sum in each order except the highest is less than ten, as 826 with
843. It is a good plan to call upon some child to give the first addend, supplying
the other addend yourself. But after they have learned to carry, as they can get
all needed facts from their charts, it is well to let them furnish both addends ex-
cept when you have some special point which you wish to bring out.
Efface your own activities and promote those of the children as much as
possible but always keep a watchful eye and a guiding hand upon them.
After the children have given number facts of their own choosing for a time
FIRST FIVE YEARS 27
they are ready to begin memorizing in regular order the facts of addition and sub-
traction. For convenience these are divided into three sets. The first set consists
of combinations in which both addends are even numbers. In the second set both
addends are odd numbers. In the third set one of the addends is an even num-
ber and the other odd. For a detailed plan for teaching the first set of combina-
tions and separations see page 18.
Observe that from this time on there are in each lesson two kinds of work,
perception work and memorization, and that they are managed quite differently.
In the perception work the children are not required to furnish from memory the
facts needed in the exercises. They use their charts freely altho they are
proud when they can say after finishing a piece of work, "I did it without my
chart." But in this early memorizing work the children are to be led to de-
pend upon the memory. For instance, when a class has learned to add 10, 2, and
4 to each even number on the chart, the teacher, before beginning that part of
the day's lesson in which this particular set of facts is used in working examples
or in tests, pins a large piece of paper over the wall chart and the children turn
their desk charts over upon their desks. This is done as a necessary preliminary
to the new and important kind of work, the memorizing. In case of a failure
there is quick reference to the chart, but the ideal of successful work is that of
sure (and later quick) memory work. The perception work gives pleasant and
thoro preparation for the conscious, definite progress which is the real aim of
all these efforts. Gradually as its purpose is accomplished it is dropped.
Until the first set of additions and subtractions are so well mastered that
every child, except those who are to be retarded, has "stood test" upon them arid
can use them accurately, the children do not begin to memorize those of the sec-
ond set, usually not before the third grade. If a child fails upon a test which he
passed triumphantly a fe\v weeks before, do not blame yourself, nor your prede-
cessors, nor the child. The constitution of the ordinary human mind is such that
there must be many temporary memorizations, many forgettings and renewings,
before our knowledge of mathematical facts is permanent and readily available.
It is the business of the school to furnish opportunities for these renewings, with-
out haste or impatience, simply dealing with the mathematical nature of the child
as it actually is, instead of assuming that it is what one might wish it to be.
As helps in the conscious memorizing we use the Identification Game, the
Testing Game, played by partners, and Individual Tests. For these, exercises,
cards must be prepared. Flash cards, which are very useful, can be bought. As
the list of successful test-passers grows, call for volunteers to try the speed test
with cards or to be "it'"' in the game of "Catch me if you can."
Thruout the year, work and play with the multiplication and division tables
is carried on parallel with that of addition and subtraction. One line of effort is
stressed for a week or two, or until certain results appear, and then the other.
Knowledge of the table of tens is a great help in learning the table of fives.
The children sing the table of fives, pointing out the multiples, or they sing and
march. They make five-pointed stars out of pieces of colored paper, each of which
is a symmetrical fifth of such a star. Reversing the little trapeziums that form the
stars, they make ten-pointed figures. They are led to see and report such facts
as that when they have twenty star points they can make four of the five-pointed
stars or two of the stars that have ten points. Building oblongs with inch
squares, making fans with toothpicks on the desks, reckoning pansy-petals (or
those of any other five-petaled flower), are useful exercises. Pupils use the mul-
tiple squares, build the table on a tagboard or show it on a buttonboard, or play
"Greeting the Multiples." (We use the word "multiple" in its objective sense,
of course, and it is no more difficult for children than "automobile" or "radi-
ator." To them it means "big, bright number on the chart.") They recite the
table in order forward and backward, first in unison and then as individual
"stunts". Then come the games with flash cards, the identification game and the
28 ARITHMETIC
various kinds of tests. Many applications of the table of fives are made in num-
ber stories about nickels, dimes, etc. Some pupils like to play store, count money
and make change and we offer them the chance, but that work goes better in the
third grade. Making clock-faces and reckoning minutes by fives are useful ex-
ercises.
The same general plans are used in the teaching of all the tables, but each
table has its own special applications. The table of twos gives many opportu-
nities for reckoning pairs, as gloves, shoes, hands, feet, eyes. The children pour
water from pint bottles into quart bottles and back again and discuss the num-
ber of pints and quarts of imaginary milk necessary to supply certain numbers
of imaginary families. Before a new table is taken up the preceding ones are
reviewed. The table of elevens (See page 15) is shown to the pupils as a liight
of stairs down which they first walk, then run. It is very easily learned because
pupils soon see such facts as that the fourth step is made of two fours, the sev-
enth step of two sevens and so on. Here we begin the .correlation of the tables
by telling the children that there is in this table an "old friend" that we met in
the five table, and setting them to hunt for it. When they have found 55 perhaps
some one will report the finding of an old friend from the two table, 2.2.
In the last part of the second year pupils begin progressive written work with
individual advance. This is a favorite occupation. A set of lesson sheets carefully
graded, containing work which they have memorized, is prepared. In the work
upon these sheets all begin together upon Lesson i. If, upon examining the pa-
pers, the teacher finds an error, she cuts it out. At the succeeding lessons the
work of each child begins where the perfect work of his last writing ended.
When he has finished Lesson i, in perfection without using the chart, he is al-
lowed to take Lesson 2, and so on. A record of each child's progress is kept.
After a time the children become separated in their individual work, some per-
haps reaching Lesson 6 or 7 while others are still working upon Lesson 2. This
process of natural selection aids in the sectioning of the grade at the end of the
term.
Third Forty minutes a day. The new work of this grade is the first mem-
Year orizing of the remaining facts of addition and subtraction, also of the
tables of nines, threes, eights, fours, sevens, and sixes.
The first work is the thoro reviewing and testing of the first set of combina-
tions and separations and of the tables of tens, fives, twos and elevens. New ap-
plications of these tables are made, as in dramatizing and in the Battle Game and
in the finding of new fractional parts of the oblongs and other geometrical figures.
Written multiplication is taught in connection with these tables. At first exam-
ples are given where no carrying is involved, such as the multiplying of 222 or of
521 by 2, 3, and 4. Later the pupils take such examples as the multiplying of
115 or 251 or 502 by each of the numbers from 2 to 9 inclusive. Notice that the
multiplicands contain only the figures i, 2, o, and 5, and require knowledge of
only the tables that are being reviewed.
Written subtraction is taught as the finding of a missing addend, by the
method so clearly explained on pages 37-40 of the California state elementary
arithmetic.
In order to prevent the repetition of mistakes, see that each child in your
class has his correction-book, made by folding a sheet of paper, and that when-
ever he makes an error in reciting, he immediately puts the correct statement
into his book. Occasionally drill upon these statements. You will find probably
that there are certain facts upon which many pupils are apt to fail. Of course
you will emphasize these facts.
As soon as the children are able to read problems intelligently, a primary
number book is used as a basis for progressive written work. Before the books
are given out, while the lesson sheets are still in use, the teacher prepares her
class for the new difficulties of the book by teaching its first subjects in an easy
FIRST FIVE YEARS 29
conversational way. In this teaching and in the work with the book the pupil is
free to consult his chart at any time when his memory fails to supply promptly
the desired fact. By this habit of carefully referring instead of guessing, mis-
takes are avoided and the facts are fixed in the mind. While the pupils are writ-
ing, the teacher ought not to move around among them. She should sit quietly in
front of her class near the board. If a pupil needs help he should come forward
after obtaining permission and put his problem on the board. Encourage your
pupils to work independently of you, as much as possible.
The same plans of "teaching ahead" with the whole class, of testing, and of
writing with individual advance are used in the succeeding grades. Without
this careful and successful preliminary teaching the work in the book becomes
difficult and confusing.
In teaching the second set of combinations and subtractions, use the same
general plan as in teaching the first set. Begin with 3 and use it as an addend
with numbers whose unit figure is I, then 3, 5, 7, 9. As the additions are learned
practice the corresponding subtractions, the finding of missing addends. Give
tests and applications. When the children generally are sure and prompt in add-
ing 3 to the odd numbers (and not before) use 5 as an addend in the same way,
then 7, then 9. Test and apply at every stage, making the pupils feel that ac-
curacy and progress are the two delightful things in their work and that their
progress depends upon their accuracy. The first and second sets together include
all the group combinations that form even numbers. Practice these combina-
tions thru 18 thoroly before taking up the third set. If the memorizing
of the first and second set of additions has been well done, that of the third is
comparatively easy. To each of the numbers i, 3, 5, 7 and 9 practice adding 2, ur,
til the pupils neither blunder nor hesitate. In the same way and with repeated
tests and applications use as addends 4, 6, and 8. As a review, reverse the pro-
cess, and to each of the even numbers 2, 4, 6, 8, add first 3, then 5, 7, 9. These
form the group combinations of the odd numbers thru 17, and they should be
faithfully practiced.
The table of nines on the chart presents a long flight of steps to be ascended
and also the short, easy flight made of 90 and 99. There are four "old friends"
in this table and the children should be allowed to hunt for them. The square
yard furnishes a special application for the table of nines. Draw a square yard on
the board and divide it into square feet. Let the children renew it as needed.
Use it for a, basis for number stories and problems. The table of threes, "the lit-
tle sisters of the nines", as was said by a child, has special applications in drama-
tizing, in the game of "Threes Out" and in measurements with feet and yards.
Measure things easily accessible. Finding heights of pupils is an interesting ex-
ercise. The buying and selling of ribbon (paper) at 5 or 2 or 9 or 3 cents a yard
furnishes many problems. In connection with the tables of eights and that of
fours much work is done with circles. Each child has his circle , made of paper
or pasteboard and at least six inches in diameter. This he folds or cuts into parts,
as halves, fourths and eighths. The pupils learn to draw circles and to bisect and
otherwise divide them. They find out by inspection how many fourths or eighths
it takes to make a whole. These sectors and the symmetrical parts of the octagon,
which the pupils are taught to construct and divide, give many useful illustrations
of the tables of eights and that of fours. "16 ounces in a pound" is given with
the eight table and "4 quarts in a gallon," shown by use of the measures, is used
in the number stories about the fours. The relative lengths of half notes, quarter
notes and eighth notes should be shown. While the table of sevens is being mem-
orized the fact that seven days make a week gives many problems. Besides the
usual work with rectangles, fractional parts, etc., there is much buying or selling
at 7 cents a yard, pound or gallon. In learning the table of sixes the hexagon, the
six-pointed star, and their symmetrical parts, all of which the children construct
and use in many decorative forms, furnish special applications of the table.
30 ARITHMETIC
Fourth Work in the elementary state textbook is begun and one-half of each
Year period is devoted to written advance in the book.
Each table is reviewed with new applications, such as factoring, common
multiples, small fractions, etc. The battle game which has been played in the
learning of the tables is now used so as to correlate them and to give much rapid
work in factoring and cancelation.
The word "ratio" is used interchangeably with "parts" until the meaning is
clear. Then the children are told that "ratio" also means "times". Much drill
is given upon the reciprocal ratios of numbers.
Long division is begun with divisors n, 12, no, 101, 120, 121, etc. After
a review of the mtultiplication table of nines, divisors such as 91, 910, 911, 89, 891,
etc., are used. Each table is reviewed and used in connection with long division.
In both short and long division each figure of the quotient should be placed direct-
ly above the righthand figure of that part of the dividend which produced it.
In the number stories stress is laid upon gain and loss in small commercial
dealings with which children are familiar. Simple work is given in U. S. money,
with bills and accounts, and in surface and boundary measurements.
Fifth The work of the preceding year has been largely anticipatory to the sub-
Year jects as presented in the latter half of the elementary textbook, and in
the fifth year the order of presentation in the book is generally followed. Games,
tests and general devices used in the previous grades are adapted for use in this
grade. In connection with ratio and proportion many exercises in working to a
scale are drawn from the departments of Manual Training and Domestic Science.
In the number stories there is much simple reasoning based upon the child's
intuitions of number and upon his understanding of simple business affairs as in-
terest, profit and loss, etc. Continued number stories (problems involving two
steps) are given. Those processes of written work, the reason for which the
child can be led to discover, are accounted for, as for instance, the addition and
subtraction of fractions. Others, as the division of one fraction by another, are
given simply as processes leading to desired results, no attempt being made to
force knowledge of the underlying principles into the immature mind. Formal
analyses, as given in model solutions, are shown as fine, logical ways of reason-
ing, to be carefully considered but not memorized without understanding, nor
used in vain repetitions as a substitute for original thinking.
My dear students, the working out of these plans which I have merely
sketched, the adjusting of the work to the abilities of individual children, the care-
ful preparation in class for indivdual advance, the promoting of the self-activity
of the pupils, the insistence upon accuracy and the preventing of mistakes, the
systematic mastery of certain portions of a subject before others are attempted,
all these require on your part earnestness in the work and a determination to suc-
ceed in it that will cause you to give much energy and to spend many hours in
serious, fruitful thinking about your pupils' development. While grasping the
general plan of this elementary instruction, if you concentrate upon the little span
of work allotted to you, laboring intelligently, faithfully, and lovingly with the
little ones entrusted to your care, you will have great rewards. Among these are
the pleasure of seeing the success and happiness of your pupils, and also the
consciousness of your own growing powers as a teacher. Hoping that these
and other rewards may be yours, I am
Sincerely your friend and co-worker,
ADELIA R. HORNBROOK.
San Jose, Cal., Sept., 1914.
IV.
DRILLS
No. of
New
Comb.
COMBINATION CHART
123456789
." i i ! i 1 i 1 i 1
Tw 123456789*
22 222222 2S
Groups making Ten (j | 3
Fiv 12345678 91 fi
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 51 6
4- ^
Groups making Five - " 1 9
Groups making Eleven 2
Nil, 12345678 9) fi
99999999 9 b
^ *-* s ^^ *
8765)
Groups making Nine 1 9 ? d I ^
Double, 12345678 91 fi
123456789) 5
Ei*ht 12345678 9
88888888 8
Groups making Eight
4 7 J
Other New Groups S A [ 2
Total 45
31
32
ARITHMETIC
LAWS OF COUNTING.
Counting by Twos
1. When the counting begins with
two or any even number, the even
numbers are named in order: 2, 4, 6,
8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, etc.
2.' When the counting begins with
one or any odd number, the odd num-
bers are named in order: 1, 3, 5, 7,
9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, 21, etc.
Counting by Tens
The unit figure is unchanged and
the tens figure increases one each time :
11, 21, 31, 41, etc.
Counting by Fives
The alternate unit figures are tha
same: 1, 6, 11, 16, 21, 26, etc.
Counting by Elevens
Count forward ten and one; 1, 12,
23, 34, 45, etc. Note that the unit and
tens figures are each increased one ex-
cept when the unit figure is nine.
Counting by Nines
Count forward ten and backward
one: 7, 16, 25, 34, 43, etc. Note that
the unit figure decreases one, and the
tens figure increases one each time ex-
cept when the unit figure is 0. Be-
fore counting by nines practice count-
ing backward by ones from 9 to 0, till
it can be done without effort or mis-
take.
Counting by Eights
Count forward ten and backward
two: 9, 17, 25, 33, 41, 49, etc., and
8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, etc. Note that
when the counting begins with an even
number, the even numbers are named in
reverse order in the units place, and
when it begins with an odd number,
the odd numbers are repeated in re-
verse order. Before taking up count-
ing by eights, practice counting back-
ward by twos from 8 to and from
9 to 1.
Laws similar to those given above
govern counting by twelves, thirteens,
nineteens, twenties, twenty-ones, etc.
The pupil should be encouraged tho
not required to discover and use them.
FIXING THE ADDITION-SUBTRAC-
TION COMBINATIONS.
The addition-subtraction combina-
tions should be well learned before the
pupil is required to use them miscel-
laneously. This requires much repeti-
tion, and demands tact and patient
perseverance on the part of the teach-
er. The following exercises will be
found helpful :
1. Counting Exercise
This exercise is a kind of exposure,
and may or may not result in the mas-
tery of a given set of combinations.
With the ones, twos, and tens it wil!
usually be found sufficient.
2. Column Addition
At first the column should contain
only the particular number under con-
sideration, except at the foot, where
any desired number may be placed.
Later any whose combinations have
been previously learned may be placed
in the column. See that results only
are named.
3. Decade Drill
For example:
22222
3 13 23 33 43, etc.,
then:
333
2 12 22 etc.
In this work have the numbers arid
the results named: 3 and 2 are 5, 13
and 2 are 15, etc. Make use of the
number chart: Name a number 2
greater than 6, 16, 36, etc. ; 2 less than
37, 17, 67, etc.
4. Flash Drill
For this purpose the teacher should
have a set of cards containing the for-
ty-five combinations and blanks.
Hold a card before the class for a
moment, then require some pupil to
give the result.
33
OUTLINE FOR DRILL WORK FOR
SECOND AND THIRD YEARS.
The ones in addition and subtrac-
tion will almost certainly be learned
thru the counting exercise. Test and
make sure by drill exercises.
1. Count by twos beginning with
two and one ; then beginning with an v
number.
2. Add single columns of numbers
consisting of twos with any number
at the bottom :
2
2 2
222
2222
22222
222222
777777
Observe that each successive column
repeats all the preceding ones. Later
put ones among the twos and add.
When 1 stands above another 1, two
should be added.
3. Supply omissions involving
twos:
( ) 4 2 5 ( )
2 ()()() 2
9 6 11 7 10
Give results as follows : 2 and 7 are
9; 4 and 2 are 6 ; 2 and 9 are 11, etc.
Later put the work in regular form
for subtraction :
5 8 11
_2 _2 9
Read 2 and 3 are 5 ; 2 and 6 are 8 ;
9 and 2 are 11.
4. Count by tens beginning with
10. Then beginning with 1, 2, 3, etc.
5. Name a number 10 more than a
given number, 10 smaller; e. g., name
a number ten more than 75, 43, 28,
etc. 10 less than 96, 54, 87, etc. Use
the number chart.
6. Learn the number groups mak-
ing 10:
98765
12345
Use these groups in columns placing
any number at the bottom. Later put
twos and ones in the columns.
Supply omissions :
( ) ^ 8 ( ) ( )
6 ( ) ( ) 9 5
10 10 10 10 10
Use flash cards. Keep the combina-
tions learned on the board.
7. Count by fives beginning with
5. Then beginning with 1, 2, 3, etc.
Note the law and compare it with
counting by tens.
8. Add columns consisting of fives
with any number at the bottom. Later
mix in ones, twos, and groups making
10.
9. Learn the groups making five.
Use these in column addition.
10. Supply omissions involving
fives, ones, twos, and groups making
10. Later put in regular subtraction
form.
11. Count by twos using the nu-
meral frame or two rows of objects.
12. Learn the doubles to 9 and 9:
123456789
123456789
13. Make use of decade drills to
fix these and other combinations
studied :
6666
6 16 26 36 etc.
14. For written work fill the blanks
in the following:
+5| -5| +2) -2
15. Teach the multiplication table
of the ones, twos, tens, and fives in
the order named. This work will be
comparatively easy for the children for
they have the foundation work al-
ready. The ones will require little
if any drill. Cards containing one
combination on each side will be found
helpful.
34
ARITHMETIC
(1) Count by twos beginning
wtih two.
(2) Build the twos in multipli-
cation as follows :
2
2 2
222
2222
22222
2222222
22222222
222222222
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
This will enable the pupil to get
at the meaning of the table. Similar
building of the table may be contin-
ued in the tens and fives. It is an
unnecessary burden to carry it fur-
ther, for by that time the child will
see that the table is based on count-
ing by the given number beginning
with the number itself.
(3) Write the twos in table i'orrn :
1X2 = 2
2X2 = 4
3X2 = 6
4X2 = 8 etc.
(4) Drill on the twos using
drills and forms similar to those
given for addition and subtrac-
tion also using cards.
(5) Write the twos in divis-
ion and give drills as suggested
above.
(6) Give exercises with the
tens similar to those outlined for
the twos. After the table has
been written draw a line as here
shown and have the pupils note
that the right hand digit is always
and that the others are the same
as the multiplier. (Do not be too
ready to point out laws to the
children. Give them time and re-
ward their discoveries.) :
1 X 10
2 X 10
3 X 10
4 X 10
5 X 10
-i
o
q
= 4
== 5
(7) Take up the fives in a sim-
ilar manner. Write the table as
shown :
1X5=5
2 X 5 = 10
3 X 5 = 15
4 X 5 = 20 etc.
Then separate it as follows:
2
X
5
= 1|0
3
X
5
4
X
5
= 2
5
X
5
6
X
5
= 3
7
X
5
8
X
5
= 4
9
X
5
10
X
5
= 5
= 2
315
415
Have the pupils note that when
the multiplier is an even number
the right hand digit is and the
other is half the even number.
Why is this? When the multiplier
is an odd number the right hand
digit is 5 and the other is half the
even number next smaller than
the multiplier. For other drills, see
directions given under multiplica-
tion and division.
16. Count backward by ones
from 9 to 0. Repeat the exercises
till it can be done quickly and ac-
curately.
17. Count by nines beginning
with 9, 1, 2, 3, etc. Note the law.
Make use of the number chart.
18. Teach the nines in addition
and subtraction. Use a table, and
decade drills.
19. Add columns consisting of
nines with any number at the bot-
tom. Later place in the columns
ones, twos, fives and groups mak-
ing one, two, ten, or five.
20. Supply omissions involving
nines and other combinations learned.
Also use the regular subtracting
form. Use cards containing com-
binations studied and omissions.
21 . Learn the groups making nine
8765
1234
Use these in column work : fix them
by decade drills and other exercises.
22. Count by elevens beginning
with 11, 1, 2, 3* etc. Note the law.
Use chart.
DRILLS
35
23. Learn the groups making
eleven :
10 9 8 7 6
12345
Use these in column work and in
subtraction.
24. Count backward by twos
from 8 to and from 9 to 1. Re-
peat the exercise until it is mastered.
25. Count by eights beginning
with 8, 1, 2, 3,' etc. Note the law.
Use chart.
26. Learn the eights in addition.
Use the chart, decade drills and
cards.
27. Add columns involving
eights. Also supply omissions and
subtract.
28. Review the groups making
eight :
7654
1234
Use them in column work and in
subtraction.
4 7
29. Learn the groups, 3 6, and
fix them by the necessary drills.
30. Review the forty-five combin-
ations by groups. (See Group
Chart.) Encourage the addition of
two figures at a time in the group
work. Where the sum of the two
is more than ten refer it to ten or
twenty. Thus :
6
13, is three more
than 10. and the result when 6 and
7 are added together in a column
is three more than the next higher
decade. When
9
9
18, is added the re-
sult is two less than the second
next higher decade.
Along with this drill work there
should be woven in much concrete
work. The problems should arise
as far as possible from the pupils'
employment at school, at home, at
play. The actual weights and meas-
ures in the hands of the pupils will
furnish material for problems,
which should always be related to
the neighborhood occupations and
interests.
MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION.
The ones, twos, tens and fives
have already been studied. They
should now be reviewed.
1. Count by elevens beginning
with 11. Write the table of elevens
in multiplication. Fix this by drills.
The simple law and the rhythm
make the learning of the elevens
easy.
2. Count by nines beginning
with 9.
3.
tion:
\Vrite the nines in Multiplica-
1X9= 9
2 X 9 = 1 | 8
3 X 9 = 2|7
4 X 9 = 3|6
5 X 9 = 4 ! 5
6 X 9 = 5 | 4
7 X 9 = 6 j 3
8 X 9 = 7 i 2
9 X 9 = 8 | 1
Draw a line between the units and
tens of the product. Note how the
figures run in each column. The tens
figure represents a number one less
than the multiplier. The sum of the
units figure and tens figure is nine.
These facts will aid the nupil at first
in recalling the nines. He must fin-
ally become able to recall a product
immediately.
Of the forty-five combinations of
the multiplication table up to 9 X
9, thirty have been studied. If tak-
en up in order there will be five new
combinations in the threes, four in
the fours, three in the sixes, two in
the sevens, and one in the eights.
These and also the twelves should
now be learned.
To memorize the multiplication
table was thought too great a task
for the child a few centuries ago.
36
ARITHMETIC
and he was required to carry a box
containing strips on which the ones,
twos, threes, etc., in multiplication
were written. When he was re-
quired to multiply by six, for in-
stance, he took out the six-strip and
referring to it found the products.
It is not surprising then that children
forget their tables, hesitate, and
make mistakes. Much drill and
much time are necessary.
Drill Work for Multiplication and Di-
vision.
1. Have the children write their
own tables.
2. Have these tables repeated
orally by each member of the class,
looking at the table first, without
looking at it later.
3. Have the tables written in
tabular form as shown below :
123456789
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 38
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27
This may be done as a class ex-
ercise on the board or paper. After
the upper row has been written the
other rows may be written in any
desired order. The teacher may
dictate a row thus: Write two
times seven, five times seven, seven
times seven, four times seven, etc.
The upper row may be written in
any order and the class required to
fill in the other rows as a seat exer-
cise.
4. Take a given number and
write its factors in sets of two. Thus:
24 = 6X4 = 3X8= 2X12
Use in this way all the products
embraced in the multiplication table.
5. Find the numbers in each dec-
ade that a given number will di-
vide. Take 8 for example: 1 to
10, 8 = 1X8; 11 to 20, 16 = 2X8;
51 to 60, 56 = 7X8, etc.
6. Find the nearest number not
larger than a given number which
another number will divide. Take
9 for example: 43, 36 = 4 X 9;
57, 54 = 6 X 9; etc.
7. Write the numbers from to
12 in a vertical column in any de-
sired order. Multiply any number
up to 12 by each of these. This
may be given as a seat exercise:
X 6 X 8 X 4
3
6
8
2
5
9
12
4
7
11
1
Then erase the left hand column,
place the sign of division before one
of the numbers at the top, and re-
store the first column. Vary the
form as suggested under addition
and subtraction.
8. Use cards as in addition and
subtraction. There are forty-five
combinations in multiplication to
9X9, and eighty-one in division lo
81 -~ 9, hence sixty-three cards wilt
be required.
These drills should be given fre-
quently even after the tables are sup-
posed to have been learned.
For the work of the first three
years the teacher should be supplied
with a set of addition-subtraction
cards (63), a set of multiplication-
division cards (63), a good primary
arithmetic containing many drill exer-
cises, suggestions and illustration for
concrete problems. The school should
be supplied with balance scales;
weights, one ounce to two pounds;
foot ruler ; yard-stick ; pint, quart,
half-gallon and gallon measures ;
clock face with movable hands ; sets
of cards containing addition-subtrac-
tion exercises, sufficient to supply
each member of a class with a card
of either set; large number chart
containing numbers from 1 to 100
written in columns of tens, and
quantities of inch cubes and inch
squares.
DRILLS
37
GROUP CHART
2
_ 1
10
= 9
8
1
765
141
3
= 2
11
= 9
8
7 6
4 A
4
-i
2
1
12
= 9
8
7 6
1 1
5
= 1
3
13
= 9
8
A
7
1
6
= 1
4 3
2O
tj
14
= 9
8
1
7
1
7
= 6
5 4
15
= 9
8
7.
8
= 7
6 5
1 1
1 16
.9
"1
8
1
9
= 1
7 6
| 17
= 9
18=|
ADDITION OF TWO OR MORE
COLUMNS.
There should be no serious diffi-
culty in teaching addition. A little
reflection will convince the pupil that
only units of the same order can be
added.
Care should be taken that results
only are named, and that when the
sum of any column is 10 or more,
the tens of the sum are combined
with the first number added in the
next column. Encourage the addi-.
tion of two numbers at a time in
groups, and insist upon it when the
group sum does not exceed 11.
6234
2857
1975
7125
18191
Say 10, 21 ; 4, 11, 19 ; 11, 21 ; 10,
18.
Should the pupil experience seri-
ous difficulty, let each column be
added and the results combined.
Such work is not uncommon in
practice when long columns are to
be added.
38
ARITHMETIC
6234
2857
1975
7125
21 units
17 tens
20 hundreds
16 thousands
18191
Addition is a fatiguing exercise,
and it is best that short columns be
used at first. Keep the Group Chart
before the class.
SUBTRACTION.
Subtraction is the finding of one
addend in addition when the sum
and the other addend are given, and
"should be approached thru supply-
ing omissions in addition :
26354 ( )
42641 42641
68995
Say 1 and 4 are 5
4 and 5 are 9
6 and 3 are 9
2 and 6 are 8
8496
5376
68995
8496
13872
13872
Say 6 and 6 are 12
10 and 7 are 17
5 and 3 are 8
8 and 5 are 13
A similar process may be followed
when there are more than two ad-
dends:
3748
9452 9452
6187 6187
19387
19387
Say 9 and 8 are 17
6, 14 and 4 are 18
6 and 7 are 13
10, 16 and 3 are 19
The usual form may then be used.
8769
4532
Say 2 and 7 are 9
3 and 3 are 6
5 and 2 are 7
4 and 4 are 8
14369
6548
4237
7821
Say 8 and 1 are 9
4 and 2 are 6
5 and 8 are 13
7 and 7 are 14
It is well that all should subtract
in this manner, but not wise to com-
pel those who subtract by a different
method to change. The teacher,
however, should make this her habit-
ual method of subtracting. It is not
necessary that the subtrahend should
be written below the minuend.
Teach the business way of mak-
ing change. For example, if the
sale amounts to $1.65 and $5.00 is
given in payment, the salesman
would say $1.75, $2.00. $3.00, $4.00,
$5.00, laying down in succession lOc,
25c, $1.00, $1.00 and $1.00. The
change is taken from the cash regis-
ter in the same order.
MULTIPLICATION
Multiplication presents no serious
difficulty after the tables have been
learned ; and these must be mastered.
If, however, a pupil is required to
multiply by 8 and does not know
the eight table, have him write it on
a strip of paper and make reference
to it when necessary. See drills for
fixing the multiplication table.
Use one figure as a multiplier at
first, and place the emDhasis on the
hozv rather than the why.
The main difficulty in multiplying
large numbers arises from the fact
that children foreet the tables. To
aid pupils in recalling and fixing the
multiplication table use the same
multiplier till it is well learned,
placing the emphasis on the . tables,
probably the 6's. 7's. and 8's, that
are most difficult. The same sug-
gestions apply in division using small
divisors.
DRILLS
39
DIVISION.
Teach long division first, using
divisors not exceeding twelve. See
that the quotient is written above the
dividend, each quotient figure being
placed directly over the right hand
figure of the dividend used in ob-
taining it. First multiply a number,
and then reverse the process. For
example :
3647
349
856)298744
2568
56
32
48
24
29176
3647
8 ) 29176
24
51
48
37
32
56
56
After the pupil has become able
to divide by long division using
small divisors, introduce short divis-
ion as an abbreviation. Then require
that short division shall be used for
all divisors less than twelve.
3647
8 ) 29176 Do not permit
the pupil to write the remainders, or
to see any one else write them.
Long Division With Large Divisors.
Long division when the divisors
are large presents three difficulties to
the beginner: the form, the approx-
imation, and the testing. These
should be overcome one at a time.
The form should be mastered while
using small divisors as suggested
above.
Divide 298744 by 856 and then
note the processes by which the re-
sult is obtained :
4194
3424
First we say 8 in 29 three times.
Then we try 3 for a quotient figure,
and find that after dividing 29 by
8 we have 5 as a remainder, which
placed with the 8 makes 58, a num-
ber more than sufficient to contain
5 three times. Hence the first quo-
tient figure is 3 and the next divi-
dend to be used is found to be 4194.
8 in 41 five times with a remainder
of 1, which being joined with nine
gives 19, a number which will not
contain ' 5 five times. Hence the
next quotient figure is not 5 but 4.
So we continue to approximate and
test, using first the left hand figure
then testing, using one or more of
the succeeding figures of the divisor.
To master this approximation re-
quires much experience on the part
of the child and time for growth. A
rule, however explicit, will not suf-
fice.
1. Use such divisors as 20, 30,
40, 50, 60, etc. Then the left hand
figure may be used as a trial divisor
and no testing is needed.
2. Use divisors in which the sec-
ond figure is one: as 41, 61, 713,
816, etc. The left hand figure is
used as a trial divisor, and the result
will nearly always be correct.
Place a number of dividends on
the board and have pupils find and
test quotient figures by inspection,
using divisors like 21. 31, 41, etc.
Repeat the exercises from day to
day.
3. Use divisors in which the sec-
ond figure is 2. When the left hand
figure is used as a trial divisor the
result will need more careful testing
and correcting.
Place several dividends on the
40
ARITHMETIC
board, and find and test the quo-
tient figure using 22, 32, 427, 521,
etc., as divisors.
)68 )84 )122 )158 )198
4. Use divisors in which the sec-
ond figure is 9. The number next
larger than the left hand may then
be used as a trial divisor and the re.
suit tested and corrected.
Continue the placing of dividends
on the board for inspection tests.
In this way the pupil will gradu-
ally learn how to find and test the
quotient figure. The teacher, how-
ever, must be satisfied with slow
progress, must persevere, and be
patient.
FRACTIONS.
Children will almost certainly
know something of fractions when
they enter school. What child has
not had to share his apple, his or-
ange, or his marbles. There can be
no valid objection against the intro-
duction of fractions with small de-
nominators in the early years of the
course. These fractions should be
concrete: as 3 fourths of a gallon,
2 thirds of a foot, etc., and the de-
nominator should be expressed in
words, and thought of as the names
of the parts. Similar fractions may
be added or subtracted, or a frac-
tion may be multiplied or divided by
a whole number. No rules should
be given. A more extended study of
fractions should be taken up in the
fifth year, and a fuller treatment be
given during the sixth year and
later.
REDUCTION.
1. Reducing improper fractions
to whole or mixed numbers and
whole or mixed numbers to improp-
er fractions presents no serious dif-
ficulty.
2. Reducing to higher terms may
be illustrated by taking two halves
of an apple and dividing each into
2 or 3 parts. It may then be seen
that = = etc
A better way, however, is to fur-
nish the pupils with strips of paper
of uniform length and have these
folden as follows :
a. Lay one strip down without
folding.
b. Fold one strip and crease it
in the center.
c. Fold a third strip and crease
it into fourths.
d. Fold a fourth strip and
crease it into eighths.
Place these strips side by side,
and it will readily be seen that
% = % = %;. y* = %; % = %
e. Draw diagrams on the board
representing these divisions.
In a similar manner diagrams may
be drawn representing the relations
of halves, thirds, and sixths ; of
halves. thirds, fourths, sixths,
twelfths, etc.
The divided apple is concrete.
The creased paper or the drawing is
a representative concrete and be-
comes a tool which the pupils may
use or image in determining other
fractional relations. Dealing with
fifths, for instance, it will be found
that
% = flo = %o = 1 %5, etc.
Observing these and other frac-
tional equivalents, which may be
worked out, the pupil will get and
understand the rule. He win also
see that fifths cannot be reduced to
ninths, fourths to elevenths, etc.
3. Reducing fractions to lower
terms follows as a corollary from
number two and needs no illustra-
tion.
4. Reducing fractions to a com-
mon denominator should be first in-
troduced in connection with addition
and subtraction. It should later be
studied as a separate topic. Small
DRILLS
fractions should be given as a rule
and the work done principally by in-
spection. If, because of the large-
ness of the c6mmon denominator,
written calculations are required, let
these be done as side work. The least
common denominator is the 1. c. m.
of the denominators and should be
found as set forth under that topic.
ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION
There is no special difficulty in
teaching addition and subtraction of
fractions, but care should be taken
that good forms are used.
1. Give much drill in adding and
subtracting similar fractions. This
work may be introduced along with
addition and subtraction of whole
numbers provided the denominator
is expressed in words. Write frac-
tions to be added or subtracted un-
der each other, especially when
there are mixed numbers.
16
36
74 =
9%
12%
6 %2
7 6 /i2
9 4 /l2
2. Use full form for work in the
fifth year writing the reduced an-
swer directly under the first column.
Use a similar form in subtraction.
Write out in full when the fraction-
al part of the subtrahend exceeds
the fractional part of the minuend.
Avoid the term '"borrow." Take one
from the 52 and change it to
twenty-fourths.
27% = 27 2 % 4
193/ 8 = 19 % 4
3. Use the abbreviated form
when addition and subtraction are
studied in the sixth and subsequent
years.
121/4
27%
83 % 2
36 %
21
8
Add and reduce the fraction first,
place the fraction of the result under
the fraction of the addends, and add
the integral part, if any, along with
the other whole numbers.
ALIQUOT PARTS.
The customary way of presenting
aliquot parts is to give a list of
aliquot parts of 100 and require
that they shall be memorized, then
to give rules for the use of these
numbers in multiplication and divis-
ion. No effort is made to assist the
pupil in memorizing the list, or to
lead him to understand and appreci-
ate the principle underlying the
rules. Such work has no education-
al value and will benefit only the
pupil who soon engages in some
commercial business which makes use
of it.
In what follows an effort is made
to relate the work so as to aid the
memory and so that laws for multi-
plication and division will be im-
pressed.
1. Count by 2 l /2 beginning with
2^. Continue the counting till a
law is found. 2%, 5, 7%, 10, etc.
Note that the ending are repeated
in order in sets of four. Note also
that 4 X 2 l /2 = 10, 8 X 2^ = 20 ;
in general that there will be as
many tens in the product as there
are fours in the multiplier. Con-
versely, when 10, 20, 30, etc., is di-
vided by 2 x / 2 the quotient will be as
many times 4 as the number has
tens.
Multiply 2y 2 by 12, 28, 24, 36,
16, 32, 44, etc.
Divide 40, 70, 30, 50, 90, 60,
80 by 2y 2 .
2. Write and learn the table of
2% to 4 X 2%. If any number is
multiplied by 2^, the product will
contain as many tens as the number
has fours and the units will be 2J/z,
42
ARITHMETIC
5, or l l /2, according as there is a
remainder of 1, 2, or 3. Thus 25 =
6X4 + 1, hence 25 X 2^ = 62^ ;
35 = 8 X 4 + 3, hence 35 X 2}^ =
Any number which ends in 0, 2^2,
5, or 7^ is exactly divisible by 2^2.
To obtain the quotient, multiply the
tens (all above units) by 4 and to
the product add the quotient ob-
tained by dividing the units by 2^.
5iy 2 ~ 2y 2 = 5 X 4 + 3 = 23;
115 -f- 2y 2 = 11 X 4 + 2 = 46.
3. Deal with 3*/j in a similar
manner and obtain laws for multi-
plication and division by 3*/j. Give
much exercise in the use of these
laws.
4. Count by 25; learn the twen-
ty-five table in multiplication to
4X25. Multiply and divide by 25
until such work becomes easy. Note
the similarity of the 25 and 2*/2
tables.
5. Count by 12% to 100. Place
the results side by side with the re-
sults obtained by counting by 2y 2
and 25.
2y 2
5
iy 2
25
50
75
25
37
50
75
10 , 100 100
Note that the unit figures agree with
the units of the 2^2 series ; also that
every second result agrees with a
result in the 25 series.
6. Write the 12^ table in multi-
plication to 8 X I2y 2 . Place the
table aside for quick reference.
If a number is multiplied by 12^,
the product will contain as many
hundreds as the number has eighths
and the tens and units of the prod-
uct will be the product of 12% and
the remainder as shown in the table.
43 = 5 X 8 + 3, hence 43 X 12% =
537% ; 77 = 9 X 8 + 5, hence 77 X
A number which ends in any num-
ber found in the table is exactly di-
visible by 12%. The quotient is
eight times the hundreds figure (all
over tens) plus the quotient ob-
tained by dividing the units and tens
by 12%. 637% -=- 12^ = 8 X 6 + 3
=51; 1187% -=-12% =8X11 + 7 =
95.
7. Take up 33#, 16^, and Stf
in succession and deal with them in
a similar manner, referring the re-
sults to the 3% series. If the series
are placed side by side, the similar-
ity and the laws will be emphasized.
Select the new results in each series
in order and learn them.
In this connection take up bills
and accounts. Use regular business
forms. Show the class samples of
bills from different mercantile es-
tablishments. Have the pupils rule
their own bills and fill them out in
a neat and orderly manner. En-
courage getting results by inspec-
tion. Let other necessary calcula-
tions be done as side work. Intro-
duce receipts, drafts, and checks. It
will be found that this touching of
actual business forms and customs
will be very attractive to the pupils.
V.
COURSE
FIFTH YEAR.
FRACTIONS.
Impress and deepen the fraction
concept by divided apples, oranges
and other objects ; ruler, yard-stick,
pint, quart, and gallon measures,
pound and other weights, etc., and
folded paper.
Change whole numbers and mixed
numbers to fractions.
Change improper fractions to
mixed numbers.
Add and subtract fractions having
a common denominator. Add and
subtract mixed numbers in a similar
manner.
COURSE
Factor products found in the mul-
tiplication table.
Find by inspection the common
multiples of numbers. The common
multiples should be the products
found in the multiplication table.
While the least common multiple
should be sought, it is not vital that
these terms should be singled out
for special study.
Find by inspection common di-
visors of numbers to twenty, to
thirty, to fifty. The numbers should
be products found in the multiplica-
tion table, and two or not more than
three numbers should be used at a
time.
Reduce fractions to larger denom-
inators, Use objects, folded paper,
and drawings to illustrate.
Add and subtract fractions of dif-
ferent denominators using the full
form. The common denominator
should be limited to products found
in the multiplication table.
Reduce fractions to their lowest
terms.
Use cancellation where there is in-
dicated multiplication and division.
Multiply a fraction by a whole
number. Multiply a mixed number
by a whole number. When the in-
tegral part is small the expression
should be reduced to an improper
fraction; when it is large the frac-
tional part should be multiplied first.
If the multiplier does not exceed
twelve, which should be the rule at
this time, the carrying should be
done at once as in other multiplica-
tion.
Divide a fraction by a whole num-
ber. Divide a mixed number by a
whole number. When the integral
part is small reduce to an improper
fraction ; when it is large divide as
in whole numbers and reduce only
the remainder to a fraction. Use
small divisors.
Find a fractional part of a whole
number. Multiply a whole number
by a fraction. Use cancellation.
Multiply a whole number by a mixed
number. Do not reduce to improper
fractions unless the integral part is
quite small.
Find a fractional part of a frac-
tion. Multiply a fraction by a frac-
tion. Give rule and use cancellation.
Reduce mixed numbers to improper
fractions.
Find a number when a fractional
part of it is given. Divide a whole
number by a fraction. Indicate the
work and use cancellation.
Divide a fraction by a fraction.
Use inversion, indicate the work,
and cancel.
DECIMALS.
Introduce decimals by using prob-
lems requiring addition and subtrac-
tion of United States money. Add
and subtract other decimals.
Multiply United States money by
a whole number, and by a mixed
number using forms for bills and
other accounts. Multiply other dec-
imals by whole or mixed numbers.
Divide United States money by a
whole number. Divide other deci-
mals by a whole number. Reduce
common fractions to decimals. Place
the quotient above the dividend, and
place the decimal point in the quo-
tient as soon as the decimal point in
the dividend is reached.
Multiply a decimal by a decimal.
Use the word per cent and the char-
acter, %, interchangeably with hun-
dredths. Find any per cent of a num-
ber. Express the per cent decimally
when using it. Find interest on
money, confining the time to years,
or years and months which will
make easy fractions of years.
Divide a decimal by a decimal. First
mark off as many decimal places in
the dividend counting from the decimal
point, as there are decimal places in
the divisor. Place the decimal point
in the quotient as soon as the mark
in the dividend is reached.
SIXTH YEAR.
STATE ADVANCED ARITHMETIC.
It is assumed at this time that the
pupil has an elementary knowledge
of fractions, that he can add, sub-
tract, multiply and divide decimals
44
ARITHMETIC
and that he has done some simple
work in percentage.
Review reading and writing of
whole numbers and decimals to bil-
lions, by the Hindu-Arabic notation.
Learn to count to one hundred by
the Roman notation, learn the sig-
nificance of I, V, X, L, C, D, and
M. Learn the additive and subtrac-
tive laws. Express various dates in
the Roman notation.
Recall and learn the tables for
long measure (inches, feet and
yards), liquid measure (gills, pints,
quarts and gallons.)
Review addition and subtraction
of whole numbers and decimals. In
this review follow the group chart,
and insist that two figures be added
at once when their sum does not ex-
2 4
ceed 12. For example when 3 or i
stand one above the other for addi-
tion, add 5. Count by 10, n, 9, 12,
and 8, emphasizing the law, and then
add groups making one of these
numbers. Give examples in com-
pound addition and subtraction in-
volving the tables learned.
Review multipliaition of whole
numbers and decimals. Give system-
atic and persistent drills on the mul-
tiplication tables, emphasizing the 6's,
7's and 8's. Impress the laws for
5's. Give exercises in multiplication
of compound numbers. Take up
special cases in multiplication: (i)
Multiplying by one with any num-
ber of ciphers annexed; (2) Multi-
plying by any number with ciphers
annexed; (3) Multiplying by 25 and
12^; (4) Multiplying by 33/3, 16^,
8y 3 and 66%.
Introduce bills and accounts. Use
regular bill paper.
Find areas of rectangles and work
out table for square measure for
square inches, square feet, and
square yards.
Find volume of rectangular solids
and work out table for cubic inches,
cubic feet, and cubic yards.
Review division of whole numbers
and decimals. Use short division
where the divisor does not exceed
twelve and place quotient above or
below the dividend as is most con-
venient. Use long division when
the divisor exceeds twelve. When
the divisor is a decimal mark off as
many decimal places in the dividend
as there are decimal places in the di-
visor. Place the decimal point in the
quotient as soon as the mark in the
dividend is reached.
Reduce a denominate number to
units of a higher order.
Take up special cases of division,
such as (i) Dividing by one with
ciphers annexed; (2) Dividing, by
any number with ciphers annexed ;
(3) Dividing by 25 and 12^2 ; (4)
Dividing by 33%, 16% and 8ft.
Give some work in compound di-
vision using such divisors as 2, 3,
4, 5; also some inverse problems in
rectangles and rectangular solids.
FACTORING.
Factor (i) Products in the multi-
plication table, writing two factors
and then resolving these factors into
prime factors; (2) Other numbers
less than 100; (3) Numbers of three
figures in which the right hand fig-
ure is o.
Learn and apply the laws for
divisibility: (i) Two, five and ten;
(2) Four and twenty-five; (3) Nine,
three and six.
COMMON DIVISORS.
Find common divisor by inspec-
tion of numbers under fifty.
Find the greatest common divisor
of given numbers under two hun-
dred by factoring one of them.
Apply common divisors in reduc-
ing fractions to their lowest terms,
and in cancellation.
COMMON MULTIPLES.
Find common multiples of num-
bers by inspection, when such com-
mon multiples do not exceed fifty.
Find the least common multiple by
factoring, the 1. c. m. not to exceed
one hundred.
COURSE
45
ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF
FRACTIONS.
Add fractions using the abbrevi-
ated form, the common denominator
being a product of the multiplication
table; subtract fractions using the
abbreviated form, the common de-
nominator not to exceed fifty
MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION OF
FRACTIONS.
Multiply a fraction by a whole
number, give rule and have it
learned. Multiply a mixed number
by a whole number ; multiply a com-
plex decimal by a whole number.
Reduce denominate fractions to in-
tegers of lower orders.
Divide a fraction by a whole num-
ber, (a) when the numerator ex-
actly contains the divisor; (b) When
the numerator does not exactly con-
tain the divisor. Give rule and have
it learned. Divide a mixed number
by a whole number. Divide a com-
plex decimal by a whole number.
Multiply a whole number by a
fraction, also by mixed number and
a complex decimal. Multiply a frac-
tion by a fraction, a mixed number
by a fraction, a complex decimal by
a fraction. Similarly multiply by a
mixed number and by a complex
decimal.
Divide a whole number by a frac-
tion, a fraction by a fraction, a mixed
number by a fraction, and a com-
plex decimal by a fraction. Sim-
ilarly divide by a mixed number and
a complex decimal.
FRACTIONAL RELATIONS.
Find a required part of a number.
Find a number when a certain
part of it is given.
Find what part one number is of
another.
Apply the same to fractions.
SEVENTH YEAR.
PERCENTAGE.
Express per cent as a decimal and
apply the same in finding required
per cent of a number.
Express certain per cents as com-
mon fractions and apply the same in
finding a required per cent of a
number or fraction.
Find a required number when a
certain per cent of it is given, first
expressing the per cent decimally,
or as a fraction.
Express a decimal as per cent ;
also change a common fraction to
per cent.
Find what part one number is of
another and find wrnt per cent one
number is of another.
Find a number a given part great-
er than another and find a number a
given per cent greater than another.
Find a number a given part less
than another ; also a given per cent
less than another.
Find a number when another
number a given part or per cent
greater than it is given ; also when
one given part or per cent less than
it is given.
APPLICATION OF PERCENTAGE.
INTEREST.
Find interest for years, years and
months, and months and days.
Find the time by compound sub-
traction and by counting the ex-
act number of days. In the latter
case, reckon 360 days as a year for
commercial transaction, and 365 for
a year for exact interest.
Study commercial paper, including
notes, drafts, checks and money or-
ders.
Study banking, including bank
discount and savings accounts.
EIGHTH YEAR.
Build up squares and extract
square root. Study and solve right
triangles.
SURFACES.
Land measure, including United
States land divisions, land surveyor's
chain. Vara.
Lumber measure, including shin-
gling-
Plastering, papering and carpet-
ing.
Areas of parallelograms, triangles,
trapezoids and circles.
46
ARITHMETIC
VOLUMES. Spheres.
Rectangular solids, prisms and Problems in analysis and ratio and
cylinders. proportion.
Pyramids and cones. Longitude and Time, including a
Frustums.
discussion of Standard Time.
VI.
REVIEWS
1. READING AND WRITING NUM-
BERS.
HINDU-ARABIC NOTATION.
1. Numbers are usually expressed
in writing by the use of ten
characters called digits. These digits
are i, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, o, and
standing alone represent one, two,
three, four, five, six, seven, eight,
nine, and naught, respectively, and
are so named.
In writing a number each digit
represents a value dependent on the
place which it occupies, this value
increasing from right to left in a
ratio tenfold. In expressing a whole
number the right hand digit repre-
sents the same value as the digit
when standing alone ; when in the
second place counting from the right
it represents a value ten times as
great; when in the third, one hun-
dred times as great, and so on.
Thus, in mi the right hand digit
represents one, the next ten, the next
one hundred, and the next one
thousand. In 22222 the right hand
digit represents two, the next twenty,
the next two hundred, the next two
thousand, and the next twenty thou-
sand. What does each digit repre-
sent in 163435?
For convenience in reading these
numbers are grouped into periods
of three figures each beginning with
units, or the right hand digit in
whole numbers. These groups are
frequently separated by commas to
aid the eye in distinguishing them.
The first five periods are named
as follows beginning at the right:
units, thousands, millions, billions
and trillions. Each place is called
an order, and beginning at the right
the orders are named as follows :
units, tens, hundreds, thousands,
ten - thousands, hundred - thousands,
millions, ten-mrllions, hundred-mil-
lions, etc.
Separate the following numbers
into periods and name the periods
and the orders: 476328, 765342708,
62840070903.
It should be noted that each per-
iod except the left hand one must
have three places and that o is
written in each vacant order.
2. Reading Numbers. In reading
numbers the periods are read
in order beginning with the one
at the left. The word and is un-
necessary in reading whole numbers
and should be omitted. For ex-
ample, 60,705,821,062 should be read
sixty billion, seven hundred five
million, eight hundred twenty-one
thousand, sixty - two. 964,000,083
is read nine hundred sixty-four mil-
lion, eighty-three.
Read the following numbers:
1. 671; 671,000; 671,000,000;
2. 403; 4,003; 40,300;
3. 520; 52,000; 5,200,000;
4. 89; 89,089; 8,900,890;
5. 47,407,047 ; 4,700,400,747 ;
6. 67,004; 149.820;
600,700,100.
400,003,000.
50,000,020.
890,089,809.
407,470,047,407.
74,000,937,506.
Name the order and give the value
expressed by each significant digit
in the following numbers, then read
' each number :
682,251; 403,075,209; 20,704,641
REVIEWS
47
3. Writing Numbers. In writing
numbers each period except the left
one must be full, each vacant order
being filled with 0.
Place the following on the paper
or board and write the numbers
under it :
Trill. Bill. Mill. Thous. Units
h.t.tr. h.t.b. h.t.m. h.t.th. h.t.u.
000,000,000,000,000
Write the following numbers, sep-
arating the periods by commas:
1. Two thousand six hundred
fifty-three.
2. Six thousand sixty-six.
3. Four million four hundred
thousand four.
4. Twenty-seven billion two hund-
red seven thousand two
hundred seventy.
5. One hundred sixteen trillion
eighty-four billion five hund-
red sixty-one million four
hundred.
6. Four million 27 thousand 36.
7. Twelve billion 305 thousand.
8. Three hundred seventy - one
trillion 60 million 8 thou-
sand 406.
9. 200 billion 2 million 20 thou-
sand 202.
io. 72 million 7 thousand 40.
Write the following, omitting the
commas :
1. 600 thousand 25.
2. 902 million 3 thousand 800.
3. 47 billion 706 million 9.
4. 6 trillion 15 million 28.
5. 391 billion 408 thousand.
6. 560 trillion 38 billion 7 mil-
lion 500 thousand.
7. 74 million 200 thousand 65.
8. 400 million 5 thousand 6.
9. 7 trillion 5 million 3 thousand
i.
io. 60 billion 800 million 4 thou-
sand 20.
Read all the numbers which you
have written.
FACTORING.
FACTORING BY INSPECTION.
Small numbers may be factored
by inspection by first separating each
number into two factors and factor-
ing the factors when possible.
24=4X6=2X2X2X3
54=6X9=2X3X3X3
28=4X7=2X2X7
In like manner factor the follow-
ing numbers :
1. 36, 42, 45, 32, 56, G3, 75, 81,
44, 48. It is not necessary that the
pairs of factors be written. They may
be thought and the final factors only
need be written.
Factor the following numbers,
writing the prime factors only:
2. 64, 66, 84, 96, 108, 144, 88,
99, 27, 125.
Numbers which end in contain
the factor 10 or 2 X 5. In factor-
ing such numbers the 2X5 should
be written first, thus:
210=2X5X5X7
3300=2X5X2X5X3X11.
Any number less than 1000 ending
in can be readily factored by in-
spection.
3. Factor 240, 340, 360, 420, 720,
630, 640, 660, 490, 390.
4. Factor 800, 900, 1200, 1800,
1600, 3100, 44,000, 75,000, 84,000,
640,000.
DIVISIBILITY OF NUMBERS.
There are certain tests by means
of which it may be quickly deter-
mined whether or not a number is
divisible by certain other numbers,
as 2, 5, 4, etc. These tests are all
based on the fact that numbers are
written on the scale of ten, i. e., that
ten ones make ten, ten tens make a
hundred, etc.
1. Two will divide a number if it
ends in 0, 2, 4, 6, 8.
2. Five will divide a number if
it ends in or 5.
3. Ten will divide a number if it
ends in 0.
48
ARITHMETIC
If the right hand digit is the
number is made up of tens. 370=37
tens, 6430=643 tens. Since two,
five, and ten each divides ten it will
divide 37 tens or 370, 643 tens, or
6430. Two will likewise divide 370
plus 6 or 376, 6430 plus 8, or 6438.
Five will divide 370 plus 5, or 375,
and 6430 plus 5, or 6435.
Applying the above principles fac-
tor the following numbers :
162, 98, 126, 132, 176, 175, 165,
105, 1150, 1450.
4. Four will divide a number if
it will divide the number expressed
by its two right hand digits.
5. Twenty-five will divide a num-
ber if it ends in 00, 25, 50 or 75.
Principles 4 and 5 depend upon the
facts that four and twenty-five will
each divide 100, and that if the num-
ber ends in 00 it is made up of hun-
dreds.
Factor the following numbers by
applying principles 4 and 5:
168, 232, 216, 288, 324, 375, 675,
825, 950, 625, 1125.
In factoring always use the form
given at the beginning of this chap-
ter. If it is necessary to take out a
factor by division, do it by using
side work.
100-^25=4. Hence 200-f-25=8,
300-^25=12. 700-^25=7X4=28
1500-^25=15X4=60.
It will be seen from these exam-
ples that when a number ending in
00 is divided by 25 the quotient may
be obtained by omitting 00 and mul-
tiplying by 4.
Write the quotient obtained by di-
viding the following numbers by 25 :
17600, 1300, 15200, 19000, 26000,
34700, 29600, 76500, 43900.
1275=1200-f-75 ; hence 1275-f-25
=48 f3=51 . 2950=2900+50 ; hence
2950-f-25=4X29+2=118. 14775
-.-25=4X147+3=591.
Divide by 25: 775, 925, 1350,
5375, 6750, 4125, 43775, 54300,
27625, 49350.
6. Nine will divide a number if
the sum of its digits is divisible by
9.
7. Three will divide a number if
the sum of its digits is divisible by
3.
8. Six will divide an even num-
ber if the sum of its digits is divis-
ible by 3.
Applying tests 6, 7 and 8, deter-
mine whether 3, 6 or 9 will divide
the following numbers : 474, 684,
543, 856, 7485, 8694, 571, 735682,
88875, 77772.
Factor: 147, 693, 198, 234, 363,
251, 2430, 294, 396, 16200.
Whether or not a number is divis-
ible by 7, 11, or 13 or any larger
prime number is best determined by
trial. If the prime numbers are
tried in the order of their size it
will never be necessary to try a
prime number for a number less than
the square of that prime number. If
no factor is found the number is
prime.
Try all the odd numbers not end-
ing in 5 between 50 and 100. Write
the factors of the composite ones.
Determine the primes and factor
the composites: 343, 199, 187, 171,
299, 323, 209, 289, 371, 357.
GREATEST COMMON DIVISOR.
In order to find the greatest com-
mon divisor of two or more num-
bers one should first determine the
prime factors of one of them. These
factors may then be tried in the
other numbers and those which are
common determined. The product
of the prime factors that are com-
mon will be the greatest common
divisor.
Find the greatest common divisor
of 84. 105, 147, 189.
84=^X^X3X7
Therefore 3X7=21, G. C. D.
First factor 84 as shown above.
Then try these factors 2, 3, and 7
in the numbers 105. 147 and 189.
By applying the tests for divisibility
to 2 and 3, trying 7, it is found that
2 will not divide each of the num-
49
bers and 3 and 7 will. Cross out the
2's and underscore 3 and 7, and
the product of 3X7, or 21, is the
G. C. D.
Find the greatest common divisoi
of the following sets of numbers :
1. 78, 130, 156, 208.
2. 70, 175, 210, 315.
3. 52, 91, 143, 221, 260.
4. 95, 133, 247, 437.
5. 99, 231, 451.
Sometimes the same factor is
common two or more times. In such
case divide each of the numbers ex-
cept the one factored by this factor
till it can be ascertained how many
times it is common.
Find the greatest common divisor
of 120, 168, 252, 432.
120=2X^X2X^2X3
2)16*
42-
63-
-108
First factor 120 obtaining 2, 5, 2,
2, 3 as the prime factors. Then di-
vide each of the other numbers by
2 twice in succession getting the
quotients 42, 63 and 108. 2 will not
divide these numbers and 5 will not,
3 will. Cross out 2 and 5 and un-
derscore 3.
2X2X3=12, G. C. D.
Find the greatest common divisor
of: (1) 81, 108, 135, 567. (2) 98,
112, 490, 336, 266. (3) 75, 45, 195,
435. (4) 44, 220, 264, 198, 681.
(5) 117, 195, 273, 351.
Greatest common divisor is used
in reducing fractions to their lowest
terms. The result is the same
whether the numerator and denomi-
nator are divided at once by their
greatest common divisor or the com-
mon factors are removed in succes-
sion. Reduce 19 %oo to its lowest
terms. 190=2X5X19. 2 and 5 are
not common. Divide by 19 and the
answer 1 % 1 is obtained. 19 %o9 =
10 /ii-
Reduce the following fractions to
their lowest terms:
1- 58 /145-
2- 66 /154.
3. 6 %05.
4. 161 /399-
5. 72 /324-
Common factors may be cast out in
indicated division.
3 3
=7X2X2 = 28 Ans.
LEAST COMMON MULTIPLE.
It is evident that a multiple of a
number must contain all its prime
factors, and that a common multiple
of the two or more numbers must
contain the prime factors of each
and contain each prime factor as
many times as it occurs in any one
of the numbers.
To find the least common multiple
of 24, 36, 60 and 72.
24=2X2X2X3
36=2X2X3X3
60=2X5X2X3
72=2X2X2X3X3
2X2X2X3X3X5=360 L. C. M.
The work of multiplying may be
shortened by taking one of the num-
bers and multiplying it by the fac-
tors of the other numbers not found
in it. Thus, in the problem solved
above, take 72 which contains 2, 2,
2, 3, 3, and multiply it by 5. 72X5
=360 Ans.
Find the L. C. M. of 28, 42, 63.
28=2X2X7
42=2X3X7
63=3X3X7
28X3X3=28X9=252 Ans.
Find the L. C. M. :
1. 36, 54, 81.
2. 16, 24, 72.
3. 35, 42, 56.
4. 38, 57, 54.
5. 45, 60, 84, 126.
Sometimes the factors of each
number may be seen by inspection.
In such examples it is unnecessary
to write out the factors.
Find the L. C. M. of 15, 21, 35,
50
ARITHMETIC
42. It may be readily seen that the
factors 2, 3, 5, 7 occur not more
than once in the numbers. The L,.
C. M. is, therefore, 42X5=210 Ans.
Find the L. C. M. of the following
without writing the factors of each
if possible.
1. 18, 21, 24.
2. 22, 33, 55.
3. 35, 45, 55.
4. 28, 24, 42.
5. 6, 8, 10, 15, 25.
If one of the given numbers is a
factor of another it may be omitted.
Find the L. C. M. of 14, 21, 35,
42. Omit 14 and 21 for each will
divide 42.
35=5X7
42=2X3X7
35X2X3=35X6=210
Find the L. C. M. :
1. 2, 3, 4, 6, 8,
2. 7, 14. 28, 42, 84.
3. 15, 30, 45, 75.
4. 8, 16, 24, 36, 48.
5. 22, 44, 66, 88, 99.
The least common multiple of
small numbers may usually be found
by inspection. This plan should be
followed when possible.
Find the L. C. M.:
1. 3, 4, 8, 12.
4, 8, 16, 20.
6, 9, 12, 18.
7, 14, 21.
5. 15, 25, 30.
Least Common Multiple is of use
in reducing fractions to a common
denominator as a preparation for
addition or subtraction.
Reduce 7/ 8 , 5 / 12 , n / 18 , %, to their
least common denominator.
The L. C. M. of 8, 9, 12, 18 is 72.
9.
2.
3.
4.
= 16 /7
Reduce to least common denomi-
nator, finding the common denomi-
nator by inspection if possible.
, 2 /S, 7 /10,
2.
3.
4.
5-
13
24 .
,
4 / 7 ,
ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF
FRACTIONS.
A good form is helpful in addi-
tion and subtraction of fractions.
The one here given is compact, bus-
inesslike, and free from objection-
able features, and should be used
exclusively after its significance is
understood through the use of the
full form.
Add:
70
4 %
io
30
28
35
25
49
The final answer 50 2 % , is the
last thing written. Any other work
besides that here written should be
done by inspection or as side work.
Add:
6243/ 1
10
2.
3.
4.
5. 417% 1 +4% 2 +70% 3 +29%.
When there are few fractions and
the common denominator is small
all the work may be done by inspec-
tion and only the fractions and the
result written.
Add 36, 43^, 18#, and 6%.
36
183/4
, 5 /7, 9 /14, 7 /10, 25 /35.
Add:
1. 3234+406^+82^+17^.
2. 8^+12>4+260^+507.
3. 433/,
+60.
4.
5.
The same form is used in sub-
tracting a fraction.
- * ^ -i
, he
51
Subtract 17% from 43%.
28
43%
17 4 /7
26%!
21
16
Subtract :
-1 C /
2. 18213/
3. 260% 184.
4. 235%-, 68%.
5. 902% 4 364%.
When the fractional part of the
subtrahend is larger than the cor-
responding part of the minuend, a
similar method is used.
Subtract 4% from
8 %
4 %
18
3
10
3 n /18 I "/IS
One is taken from the 8 and
changed to 18th, giving 1 % 8 , the
numerator being the same as the
number above 3. 10 taken from 18
leaves 8 and 8 plus 3 equals 11.
Subtract
1. 72% 38^.
2. 174# 89% 2 .
3. 500 43%.
4. 294iy 24
5.
Give the results in the following
by inspection:
1. 3/4 H-
2.
3.
4.
5. 20% 8#.
6. 48 37%.
27^ %.
65% 57%.
'
7.
8.
9.
10.
183^ 6% 2 .
To Multiply a Fraction by a Whole
Number.
In multiplication and division of
fractions it is best to memorize a
clear concise rule.
To multiply a fraction by a whole
number, multiply the numerator by
the whole number and place the re-
sult over the denominator.
Multiply % by 5.
2% by 14.
i% 8 by 18.
n/2! by 15.
Multiply :
1. H by 9. 4.
2. i% 6 by 12. 5.
3. 134 by 6. 6.
The work may be indicated and
the process often shortened by can-
cellation.
Multiply 23^ by 28.
7
28 X 23^ =
4.
5.
6.
5% 8 by 32.
7^ by 8.
17% by 9.
2
Multiply :
1. % 2 by 18.
2. % 4 by 35.
3. 2% by 15.
If the integral part of a mixed
number is large it is not best to re-
duce to an improper fraction before
multiplying. Where the multiplier
consists of but one figure the reduc-
tion and carrying can be done at
once.
2734
7
Multiply 2734 by 7.
Multiply :
1. 126% by 9.
2. 2373^ by 6.
3. 46% 2 by 7.
4. 2649% ! by 8.
5. 4285 7 / 12 by 5.
If the multiplier consists of two
or more digits it is best to multiply
the fraction and whole number sep-
arately.
Multiply 67^ by 29. 67^
29
52
ARITHMETIC
Multiply :
1. 358% by 28.
2. 75% 2 by 32.
3. 2674% 5 by 25.
4. 1960%! by 24.
5. 3602% 6 by 48.
To Divide a Fraction by a Whole
Number.
To divide a fraction by a whole
number divide the numerator or mul-
tiply the denominator by the whole
number.
Divide 4j/ 5 by 6.
Divide 187% by 8.
Divide % by 3
If each fourth is divided by 3 it will
be seen that the whole is divided
into twelve parts. Hence
Divide :
1. 2 %
2. 3 %
3. 8V 7
by
by
by
4.
7.
]2.
4. 834
5. 12$
6. 67^
by 5.
, by 7.
LI by 9.
Divide
1%
by 3.
17
Divide :
?
1. 9 /io
2. 23/ 7
3. 4%
4. 123/
by
by
by
4 b>
4.
5
6.
> 8.
.
6y 4 by 5.
The operation may be indicated
and the work often shortened by
cancellation.
Divide
by 12.
Divide :
1. 14 / 15 by 21. 4. 73/6 by 9.
2. 7% by 10. 5. 4 % 5 by 33.
3. l6 2 / 3 by 20. 6. 7$i by 39.
When the integral part of a mixed
number is larger than the divisor it
is not best to reduce to an improper
fraction at first. If the divisor is
small use short division.
8)187 3 / 7
Side work :
Divide :
1. 4334 by 7.
2. 295/ 8 by 9.
3. 265% by 8.
4. 1982^ by 8.
5. 6371% by 5.
6. 76813/6 by 6.
If the divisor is large use long di-
vision.
Divide 6744% by 17.
17)6745 %
51
164
153
115
102
13
Side work:
13% = 12
Divide :
1. 86 4 / 7 by 14.
2. 2763^ by 23.
3. 1679-/,., by 18.
4. 3462% by 26.
5. 7632-^ by 15.
6. 87652% ! by 21.
To Multiply a Whole Number by a
Fraction.
Since the product of two factors
is the same no matter which is used
as the multiplier the rule for multi-
plying a fraction by a whole number
may be used. When the whole num-
ber is large it is frequently desirable
to use the fraction as the multiplier.
To multiply a whole number by a
fraction multiply the number by the
numerator and divide the product by
the denominator:
Multiply 47 by 3^.
="=17 Ans.
FRACTIONS
53
Multiply :
1. 65 X%.
2. 87 X%.
3. 432 X%.
4. 76X 8 /n.
5. 43X1%.
6. 216 X 2%.
It is not necessary and frequently
not desirable to reduce a mixed num-
ber to an improper fraction before
multiplying. It is best in such cases
to multiply by the fractional part
first.
Multiply 89 by
89
27%
8)267
33^
623
178
4.
5.
6.
2436^
Multiply :
1. 27 by % 2 .
2. 44 by 1%.
3. 45 by % 5 .
88 by %.
496 by 2934. .
57851 by 43%.
To multiply a fraction by a frac-
tion multiply the numerators for the
numerator and the denominators for
the denominator of the product.
Multiplying a fraction by a frac-
tion is best explained by the use of
a diagram. Multiply 75 by 79.
y 2 oty 5 = y w , hence
#x#=Ko.
Similarly */ 2 X ft = % .
In like manner it may be shown that
%x% = % 5 ; %x% = 1 % 2 ; etc.
Have the pupils find the products
by using the diagram. By compar-
ing the results with the factors, the
rule may be deduced.
The operation should be indicated
and cancellation used when possible.
As a rule mixed numbers should be
reduced to improper fractions before
multiplying.
Multiply :
1. % by % 4 .
2. 12 /25 by ;% 8
2% by 3% .
3.
4.
5.
6.
S/, V 55/ V IS/'
/ll <*N /84 A /26-
2% X 4% X 7%.
4/ii X 5% X 7% X 3%.
A compound fraction is reduced to
a simple fraction by multiplication.
Reduce % of % 2 of 6% to a simple
fraction :
5 7
of % 2 of 6% =-X X
Simplify :
1. % of 4%.
2. % of 6% + % x of 2% 4 .
3. ^ of 224 of %.
4. % of 2y 5 of 1% 5 -- % of
2%.
5. %> of i% 8 + %! of 6H-
2%.
When the integral part of a mixed
number is large, it is best not to re-
dure to an improper fraction. In
such cases multiply thru by the
numerator of the multiplier and di-
vide the result by the denominator.
Multiply 286% by %.
286%
(Side work)
%
9)2293% multiplying by 8.
254% dividing by 9.
Multiply :
1. 796% by %.
2. 384%! by %.
3. 49% 3 by %L
4. 3492% by %.
5. 4628% 5 by %.
6. 937% by %!.
If the multiplier is a mixed num-
ber, multiply through by the fraction
as shown above and then by the in-
tegral part.
54
ARITHMETIC
Multiply 679% by 8%. (Side work)
679 4, 7
8 %
3%^ 9 = 34 /e
.
'63
9)3397 % 1 Multiplying by 5
5436
34
36
5814 i/ 9 | /63 = iy 9
If the integral part of the multi-
plier is large multiply the fraction
by it and write the result as a part
of the product, then muliply the in-
tegral parts together.
Multiply 4758 7 /n by 37%.
4758 %!
37%
4) 14275 1 ?!-! Multiplying by 3
3568 4 % 4 dividing by 4
23 %'!
33306
14274
179638 2 %
4
Multiply :
1. 416% by 7% .
2. 3652% by 9%.
6942% by 8%.
5873%! by 25 1 /.
3254% 3 by 43%
2735% by 369%.
(Side work)
43 31 . %1 ^43 /U
37X"/11 = 25 %1
=23%!
3.
4.
5.
6.
To Divide a Whole Number by a
Fraction.
In order to find how many
times 4 ft. is contained in 8 yards
it is necessary to change both num-
bers to the same kind.
8 yds.= 24 ft.
24 ft. -r-4 ft.= 6 Ans.
Divide 10 ft. by 15 in.:
10ft. = 120 in.
120 in. ^-15 in= 8 Ans.
In like manner when a whole
number is to be divided by a frac-
tion the whole number should be re-
duced to a fraction having the same
denominator as the divisor. Hence
the rule:
To divide a whole number by a
fraction multiply the whole number
by the denominator and divide the
result by the numerator, or multiply
the whole number by the divisor in-
verted.
Divide 28 by %.
28 -4- % = 28 y 9 == 2J2/ =
Divide 56 by 5%:
56 -f- 5y 4 = |0X ~ =
=10
Divide :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
37 by %.
42 by 2%.
78 by 7 3 / 7 .
5 by iy 2 .
16 by 5y 3 .
65 by % of 65/2.
If the whole number is large and
the denominator of the fraction is
small, write the divisor to the left:
Divide 4763 by 5%.
Change both to thirds:
5%) 4763 840% 7
17
) 14289
17)14289
136
68
68
9
Divide :
1. 2769 by 2>4.
2. 11483 by 1^.
3. 7925 by 3%.
4. 37261 by U.
5. 17984 by 2%.
6. 21358 by 7^.
In the exercises in division of frac-
tions so far solved the entire quo-
tient including both fractional and
integral parts has been obtained. It
is sometimes desirable to have only
the integral part of the quotient and
to know what the remainder is. The
remainder is the undivided part of
the dividend, hence is of the same
FRACTIONS
55
kind. For example, if dresses each
requiring 9 yards are made from a
piece of cloth containing 67 yards,
7 dresses can be made and there will
be a remainder of 4 yards.
The remainder may be found in
either of two ways : 1st, By multi-
plying the divisor by the integral
quotient and subtracting the product
from the dividend ; 2nd, By taking
the remainder after the last division,
noting what it is.
In the last model given above, the
integral quotient is 840 and the re-
mainder is % or 3, since both divi-
dend and divisor were changed to
thirds. It may be obtained by the
first way given above as follows :
Dividend 4763
840 X 5% = 4760
Give the entire quotient in each
of the examples here given, also the
integral quotient and remainder in
all except example 6.
If the dividend is a mixed num-
ber with large integral parts and the
common denominator is small, write
the divisor to the left:
Divide 687^ by 2%. Reduce both
to sixths:
687 y 2
Rein. 3
Find the integral quotients and
remainders in the problems in last
two exercises given above.
16 )4125
32
92
80
125
112
13
1.
To Divide a Fraction by a Fraction. Divide:
If the fractions have a common
denominator, divide the numerator of
the dividend by the numerator of the
divisor.
Ans. 257i% 6 , or 257
Quo. and 2y 6 Rem.
Divide
by j/ 5 .
-:- = 3 - = 9 Ans.
Divide :
1. 2 %5 by % 5 . 4.
2. 6^ by #. 5.
% by %.
% by 4%.
3. I8y 3 by 3^. 6. 7% by 2%.
Give the entire quotient in eacte
example here given ; also the inte-
gral quotient and the remainder in
all except example 5.
If the common denominator is
small, reduce the fractions to a com-
mon denominator and divide as
above.
Divide 7^ by 1%.
7y 2 -^iy 4 = z%^-% = 6 Ans. -
Divide :
i. sy 3 by 2y 6 .
2. 15% by % 2 .
3. 14% by % 5 .
4. ii/s by M.
5. y 6 by ft.
6. 6y 3 by sy 2 .
2647% by 1%.
2. 67584^ by 3^.
3. 473^ by iy 2 .
4. 358^ by 23/ 4 .
5. 627% by 4%.
6. 3721^ by 73/ 5 .
A fraction may be divided by a
fraction by applying the following
rule:
To divide a fraction by a fraction,
invert the divisor and proceed as in
multiplication.
Divide 4% by %:
4% -3- 5 /s = 30 /7 X % = 48 / 7 = 6 6 /7-
When problems are solved in this
manner, cancellation may be used
and the entire quotient only is ob-
tained. If the integral quotient and
the remainder are desired the re-
mainder may be found by multiply-
ing and subtracting as previously
given.
__ I 28
Dividend
6X
4 2 /7
= 334
8
21
%s\ 15 A
28
56
ARITHMETIC
Hence the integral quotient is 6
and the remainder 1 % 8 .
Divide :
I- % by ft.
2. 33/ 7 by 5% 4 .
3. % of 63/ 7 by 7y 2 .
4. ^ of 12% by 34 of 2% 4 .
5. 7^ by % of 63/.
6. ^ of % of 3# by % of 4J/.
A complex fraction is merely an
indicated divisor in which the num-
erator is the dividend and the de-
nominator the divisor. It can be
simplified by performing the indi-
cated operations.
Simplify V
Simply:
H
334
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
of 4%
434
+
% of 8y 5 -iy 10
14-% of 5y 4
3Z v 13/
/5 A - 1 - /4
THE USE OF SIGNS.
1. If only the signs + and
occur in an expression the opera-
tions are to be performed in order
from left to right.
48
48
48
6X2= 16
2 X 6 = 144
G-r-2 == 4
3. If the signs +, , X, ana
-4- occur in an expression the mul-
tiplications and divisions are to be
performed first, and then the addi-
tions and subtractions.
12+3 X 2 9-^-3=12+63=15
Find the value :
1. 4X7 82+6X3.
2. 2712-^3+2.
3. 18+9X4^-64.
4. 16X3+244-8X2 18-i-6.
5. 7X5+104X5+3.
Simplify :
of
13
3 / 28 X2.
i% 8 of
of
iy 4 of 1%
Ans. 20.
2
3.
711
63/ 16 +7 %
Ans. % 5
of I 13 /i6+l% of 6^-1^ of 5%
of 2% of
Ans.
4.
5.
6.
634+5^ X3ft
of -f-
of
Ans. 10 55 / 112
'5 Of
r Ans.
- Of
o-% Of 23/ 8
Ans.
M 2/3
X -4-20
Ans. 1
2. If only the signs X and -4-
occur in an expression the opera-
tions are to be performed in order
from left to right.
Simplify the following:
is/ O f io/ 7 .
/8 OI /17
of
Ans. 4y 10
DECIMALS
57
2 o8i Ans6%
-o%-2%-4%-10^
Q / 2 /3 i 47 .^r o-zz I'// . IK/
' X 4143^ +% C l/20-T- 1S /25
-2V 40 AllS. % 5
1 --
'
Ans. 14
5
'
6 _- 1 /
--
^ of 22/ 2
i6
Ans. 5 %.- 2
8.
+ -r
3/ 5 of 1%
_2y 12 --2iy 17 Ans. 1/2
r Ans.
DECIMALS.
In decimal fractions the denomina-
tor is 10, 100, 1000, or, in general,
1 with one or more ciphers annexed.
It is not written, but is indicated by
a dot called a decimal point placed
in the numerator.
The number of places to the right
of the decimal point in the numera-
tor is the same as the number of
ciphers after the one in the denomi-
nator. Thus, in .4, .37, 6.145 the de-
nominators are 10, 100 and 1000,
respectively.
If the decimal has no other frac-
tion attached it is a pure or a mixed
decimal.
In a pure decimal the numerator
is less than the denominator. Hence
there are no significant figures to the
left of the decimal point. .17, .809
and .0653 are pure decimals. These
correspond to proper fractions.
In a mixed decimal the numerator
equals or exceeds the denominator.
Hence there must be some significant
figure or figures to the left of the
decimal point. 3.7, 60.08, 1.2374 are
mixed decimals. They correspond to
mixed numbers and improper frac-
tions.
In reading pure decimals, read the
numerator and then give the name
of the denominator. Thus, .26 is read
twenty-six hundredths, .0026 is read
twenty-six ten-thousands, .00326 is
read three hundred twenty-six hun-
dred-thousands.
Read: .704, .0470, .600, .00006,
.0400, .410, .000910, .0000900, .0572,
.5072.
Mixed decimals may be read in
two ways : as a mixed number, and
as an improper fraction. When read
as a mixed number and is used at
the decimal point only, for this sep-
arates the integral from the frac-
tional part. Thus, 4.9, 27.432, 600.-
028 are read four and nine-tenths,
twenty-seven and four hundred thir-
ty-two thousandths, six hundred and
twenty-eight thousandths, respective-
ly. In reading a mixed decimal
as an improper fraction, read
the entire numerator as it would
be read if there were no decimal
point and then give the name
of the denominator. Thus, 6.7,
43.007, 75.0800, 9.60 are read 67
tenths, 43007 thousands, 750800 ten-
thousandths, and 960 hundredths, re-
spectively.
Read the following, first as mixed
numbers and then as improper frac-
tions :
60.009
307.0705
9.43075
600.7
600.007
9 . 0009
150.7209
61.4
100.008
5.9
728.46
72800.46
15.09
1500.09
700.008
Write the following:
1. 4 hundred-thousandths, 400
thousandths.
2. 3000 ten-millionths, 3010 mil-
lionths.
3. 805 tenths, 800 and 5 tenths.
58
ARITHMETIC
4. 3076 hundredths, 3000 and 76
hundredths.
5. 500 ten-thousandths, 510 thou-
sandths, and 500 and 10 thousandths.
Annexing a cipher to a decimal
multiplies both numerator and de-
nominator by ten and therefore does
not change its value. Thus, 4.6=
4.60=4.600=4.6000, etc. A whole
number may be written as a decimal
by placing a decimal point to its
right and annexing one or more
ciphers. Thus, 43 = 43.0 = 43.00
=43.000=43.0000, 'etc. Read both
as a mixed decimal and as an im-
proper fraction. Reduce 21 to tenths,
to thousandths, to miliionths.
Dropping a cipher at the right of
a decimal divides both numerator
and denominator by ten, hence does
not change its value. Thus, 2.4000=
2.400=2.40=2.4. Read each.
Moving the decimal point one
place to the right divides the de-
nominator by ten without changing
the numerator, hence multiplies the
fraction by 10. Name the numera-
tor and the denominator in each of
the following: .000726, .00726,
.0726, .726, 7.26, 72.6, 726. Read
each.
Moving the decimal point one
place to the left multiplies the de-
nominator by 10 without changing
the numerator, hence it divides the
fraction by 10. Name the numerator
and the denominator in each of the
following: 38, 3.8, .38, .038, .0038,
.00038, Read each.
Reduce a Decimal to a Common
Fraction.
A pure decimal may be changed to
a common fraction by writing the
denominator under the numerator,
omitting the decimal point. The
fraction may then be reduced to its
lowest terms. Thus, .072= 72 ^ 00 fv rr:::
9 /125-
Reduce to common fractions and
to their lowest terms :
.45 .144 .625
.045 .00144 .6205
.405 .10044 .00625
Mixed decimals may be treated
either as mixed numbers or as im-
proper fractions. Thus, 16.25=
16 25 /ioo = 16M or
16.25= 1625 / 10 o= 65 /4=16'/4.
Reduce the following both ways:
6.56 43.75 341.8
9.006 12.15 3.418
90.06 1.215 2.760
ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF
DECIMALS.
Read the following: .3, .03, .003,
.0003. It will be seen from the
above that a figure in the first place
to the right of the decimal point rep-
resents tenths; in the second, hun-
dredths ; in the third, thousandths ;
and so on. For this reason the or-
ders to the right of the decimal point
are called tenths, hundredths, thou-
sandths, ten-thousandths, etc. Name
the order represented by each figure
in the following: 4063.259187. Note
that in reading a decimal the name
of the right hand order is given.
Note that 1=1.0, .1=.10, .01=
.010, .001=.0010, and in general that
ten units of any order makes one
of the next higher. Hence in addi-
tion and subtraction of decimals,
carrying is done the same as in
whole numbers. Care must be tak-
en that units of the same order stand
under each other and are added.
Add:
1. .247
.6053
.0958
.86
.09016
2. 86.094
32.7005
603.00951
720.900084
.78
3. 8200 -f 2.834 -f 97.6005 -f
306.942.
Subtract :
4. .784
.329
DECIMALS
59
5. 64.3
28.56
6.
970.
7.083
7. 23.62.36.
8. 7.4 .0659
9. .7 .0849.
10. 543.2757.904.
MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION OF
DECIMALS.
The principles that apply in com-
mon fractions apply also in decimals,
and the same rules for multiplication
and division might be used. It is
better, however, to use special rules
in handling decimals.
To Multiply a Decimal by a Whole
Number.
In common fractions the numera-
tor is multiplied and the denominator
is not changed. Likewise in deci-
mals the number written, the nu-
merator, is multiplied by the whole
number and the same number of
places pointed oft'.
Multiply 29.67 by 34.
29.67
34
11868
8901
1008.78
Multiply :
1. .084 by 149.
2. 63.828 by 365.
3. 920.05 by 76.
4. .475 by 357.
5. .625 by 96.
To Multiply a Decimal by One with
one or more ciphers annexed.
Multiply .4768 by 1000.
.4768
1000
RULE To multiply a decimal by
cue with ciphers annexed, move the
decimal point as many places to the
right as there are ciphers annexed to
one.
Note that this is merely a kind of
cancellation. Write the result at
once. Thus, 4.672X100=467.2.
Multiply :
1. 67.853 by 100.
2. 6.3009 by 1000.
3. 7.48 by 10000.
4. .76 by 100.
5. .706 by 100000.
To Multiply a Decimal by Any Num-
ber with Ciphers Annexed.
Multiply .0674 by 4700.
.0674
4700
476.800 or 476.8
471800
2696
316.7800 or 316.78.
RULE: Multiply as in whole num-
bers and move the decimal point as
many places to the right as there are
ciphers annexed in the multiplier.
When the multiplier is not larger
than 12 with ciphers annexed, write
the result at once. Thus, 4.7954 X
7000=33567.8.
Multiply :
1. 30.795 by 600.
2. .07532 by 9000.
3. 48.73 by 80000.
4. 2.876 by 4300.
5. 672.9 by 128000.
6. .00924 by 86000.
To Divide a Decimal by a Whole
Number.
One way of dividing a fraction by
a whole number is to divide the nu-
merator by the whole number with-
out changing the denominator. Ap-
plying this to decimals would give
the rule here stated.
60
ARITHMETIC
RULE: To divide a decimal by a
whole number divide as in whole num-
bers and point off as many decimal
places in the quotient as there are
decimal places that have been used in
the dividend.
The decimal point should be
placed in the quotient as soon as it
has been reached in the dividend. li
the quotient is placed in its proper
position over the dividend, the
decimal point of the quotient will
come directly over the decimal point
of the dividend.
Note that there must be a figure
in the quotient for every figure
which has been used to the right of
the decimal point in the dividend.
Divide 2937.97 by 47.
62.51 Ans.
47)2937.97
282
117
94
239
235
47
47
Divide 4.6292 by 284.
.0163 Ans.
284)4.6292
2 84
1 789
1 704
852
852
Divide :
1. -95.88 by 94.
3130.48 by 872.
.0201474 by 54.
19.7635 by 841.
3123.6 by 685.
332.45 by 488.
The divisor is not always exactly
contained in the dividend. There
may be a remainder, however far the
division is carried. In such cases
one of three things may be done:
The division may be carried as far
as desired and the remainder
dropped, the quotient may be ob-
tained as far as desired and the re-
mainder noted, or the remainder and
divisor may make a fraction to be
attached to the last quotient figure.
Divide 185.72 by 345, obtaining
the quotient to three decimal places.
.538
345)185.720
172 5
13 22
10 35
2 870
2 760
110
110 /345= 22 /69
1st Quotient .538+.
2nd Quotient .538 Rem. .110.
3rd Quotient .538 2 % 9 .
Expressions like the third quotient
are called complex decimals.
Divide carrying the quotient to
two decimal places and express the
result in three ways as shown above:
1. 45.7 by 21.
7695.83 by 492.
925 by 364.
904.68 by 283.
3.59 by 87.
3658.74 by 364.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To Divide a Decimal by one with
one or more Ciphers annexed.
One way of dividing a fraction by
a whole number is to multiply the
denominator by the whole number,
leaving the numerator unchanged.
This may be applied in dividing a
decimal by one with ciphers annexed
as follows:
DECIMALS
61
RULE: To divide a decimal by
one with one or more ciphers an-
nexed move the decimal point as many
places to the left as there are ciphers
annexed to the one.
by 100. Answer
Divide 267.43
2.6743.
Divide :
1. 639.4 by 10.
2. 47.085 by 1000.
3. .0038 by 100.
4. 286. by 100.
5. 76.32 by 1000.
6. 4.694 by 1000000.
To Divide a Decimal by any num-
ber with ciphers annexed, cross off
the ciphers at the right of the di-
visor and move the decimal point
in the dividend as many places to
the left, then divide by the remain-
ing figures in the divisor as hereto-
fore.
It is best not to move the decimal
point, but to indicate by a mark the
place to which it should be moved.
Do not fail to place the mark before
beginning the division and to place
the decimal point in the quotient as
soon as the mark in the dividend is
reached.
Divide 2973.6 by 1800.
1.65 2
1800)29 '73. 6
18
11 7
10 8
93
90
3 6
3 6
Divide :
1. 679.35 by 15000.
2. 7.84 by 39200.
3. .0018 by 4500.
4. 5.736 by 16000.
5. 57548.4 by 5460.
6. 72.9 by 270000.
To Reduce a Common Fraction to a
Decimal.
A fraction is an indicated division
in which the denominator is the di-
visor. Hence a fraction may be re-
duced to a decimal by annexing
ciphers to the numerator and divid-
ing by the denominator. A decimal
point should be placed after the nu-
merator before the ciphers are an-
nexed.
Reduce % 6 to a decimal :
.4375 Ans.
16)7.0000
6 4
60
48
120
112
80
80
Reduce to decimals :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ft
7 /80-
29 /250.
13 /6
625.
8. 4 % 6 .
9.
10.
11.
12.
753 /2
250-
16 /5
500.
Most fractions will not make ex-
act decimals. In reducing such frac-
tions to decimals the result may be
obtained to the desired number of
decimal places and the remainder
dropped or the result may be writ-
ten as a complex decimal.
Reduce the following fractions to
decimals of three decimal places and
drop the remainder:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ms.
5 /17-
%;
77 /i!
%7
85-
6.
7.
8.
763 y -
K 8 . 10.
Reduce the following to complex
decimals of four decimal places:
%
187.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
5 /17-
5 /77-
#00.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
T/11000-
70 %8.
61-
62
ARITHMETIC
A complex decimal may be ex-
tended to any required number of
decimal places by annexing ciphers
to the numerator of the common
fraction and dividing by its denomi-
nator and annexing the result to the
original decimal part.
Reduce the 6.7% 3 to a complex
decimal of three decimal places.
Two additional places are required
so two ciphers are annexed to the 5.
38% 3
Reduce to common fractions :
13)5.00
3 9
1 10
1 04
Hence 6 . 7% 3 = 6 . 738% a .
Reduce the following to complex
decimals of four decimal places :
1. .63%!. 6. .14 3 / 70 .
2. 7.8 9 /77 . 7. 9.0 2 % 9 .
3. 67% 7 . 8. 487/ 31 .
4. .00%i. 9. .0%oo.
5. .760% 4 . 10. 60.27% 7 .
In complex decimals the common
fraction belongs to the order to
which it is annexed. Thus, .26%
means .26 and % hundredths. .0%
is read % tenths. A fraction does
not represent an order and should
never be immediately preceded by a
decimal point.
Write % hundredths; 4% thou-
sandths ; % tenths.
A complex decimal may be re-
duced to a common fraction by re-
ducing the numerator to an improp-
er fraction and writing for the de-
nominator the denominator of the
common fraction followed by as
many ciphers as there are decimal
places.
Reduce .47% to a common frac-
tion.
= 332 /7, hence
1. .631/3.
2. .055%.
3. .63%!.
4. 8.07y 9 .
5. .00 4 / 7
6. 3.0%!.
7. .30 4 /i 3 .
8. .6 2 %i
9. .4% .
10. .16 3 / 7 .
The number of decimal places in
a complex decimal may be reduced
by treating the part which follows
the desired stopping place as a com-
plex decimal.
Reduce .0286% to a complex deci-
mal of two decimal places.
It is required to reduce the .0086%
to a fraction of hundredths.
. 86% = 26o /300 = i.y ig
.0286% .02i3/ 15 .
Note that .0086 is .86^ of a hun-
dredth.
Reduce to complex decimals of
one decimal place :
1. 6.73%. 6. 7.600 2 % 6 .
2. .436 3 / 7 . 7. 4.581%i.
3. .07 3 /n. 8. .000% 3 .
4. .80%. 9. .7930 2 % 7 .
5. .340% 10. 8.47%!.
The student should be able to de-
termine by inspection whether or
not a fraction whose denominator is
less than one hundred, or even one
thousand will make an exact deci-
mal.
A common fraction is reduced to
a decimal by division. The numera-
tor with ciphers annexed must ex-
actly contain the denominator, or,
what is the same thing, every factor
of the denominator must cancel simi-
lar factors in the numerator or the
quotient will be fractional. Annex-
ing a cipher to the numerator in-
troduces the prime factors 2 and 5
only, and additional ciphers merely
increase the number of 2's and 5's.
Determine whether or not %,
% 8 , and %o : , will make exact deci-
mals.
%e =
3X3X^X5X^X5X^1X5X^X5
9.0000
= .5625.
16
2X2X2X?
DECIMALS
3X3X2X5X2X5X2X5
9.000
->X2X7
The factor 7 cannot be introduced
by annexing ciphers, hence %g will
not make an exact pure decimal.
3X3X2X5X2X5X2X/>
9.000 _
7125 =-~ .U/J
Determine by inspection which of
the following fractions will make
exact pure decimals, and test your
conclusions :
I-
2.
3.
4.
5-
6.
7 /1
18-
7. 2 56 .
9.
10.
11.
17
7 /8
If the fraction is in its lowest terms,
the denominator must contain no prime
factor except 2's or 5's, or 2's and 5's
in order to reduce to a pure deci-
mal. The number of decimal places
is the same as the number of 2's or
5's in the denominator. The pow-
ers of 2 under 1000 are 2, 4, 8, 16,
32, 64, 128, 256, 512 ; those of 5 are
."). 25. 125, and 625. These num-
bers, or these with one or more
ciphers annexed, are the only num-
bers under 1000 which being used
as denominators of fractions will
make pure decimals if the fractions
are in their lowest terms.
Write all the denominators under
1000 of fractions that will make
pure decimals and tell how many
decimal places will be required foi
each. Test your answers.
When complex decimals are to be
added or subtracted they must first
be reduced to the same order.
Add 47 r '; and .27'- and .0954%!
and 8.643
13905
41715
.0431055
64
ARITHMETIC
Multiply :
1. .784 by .932.
2. .2653 by .317.
3. .0695 by .01082.
97.65 by .6438.
.03836 by .837.
.0907 by 470.
Complex decimals are multiplied
in similar manner.
Multiply 67.954% by .09.
67.954%
.09
4.
5.
6.
6.115923/ 7
Multiply 7.65 by .073%
7.65
.073%
6)3825
6371/2
2295
5355
.56482^ or .564825
Multiply 6.743% by <2 S%.
.6743 %
.28
7) 26974 % | 21
38531%!
18 % I
53944
13486
11
14
.192676 f 21 |25/ 21
Multiply :
1. 86.357% by .08.
2. .0362%! by 4.5.
3. 6.947 by .004%.
4. 463.85 by 18. 5% j.
1.058?$ by .07%.
5.
6. 2.53% 2 by 1.6^.
To Divide a Decimal by a Decimal.
If the divisor and dividend have
the same number of decimal places
they will have a common denomina-
tor, and the quotient be a whole
number the same as in division of
common fractions.
Divide 4.688 by .293.
16
.293)4.688
2 93
1 758
1 758
If the dividend has more decimal
places than the divisor, a mark
should be placed in the dividend cut-
ting- oft as many decimal places as
the divisor contains This will de-
termine he place where the intergral
part of the quotient ends and the
decimal part begins. The mark
should be placed in the dividend be-
fore the division is begun.
Divide 4.7875 by .125.
" 38.3
.125)4. 787' 5
3 75
1 037
1 000
375
375
Care should be taken that the
quotient is placed in its proper posi-
tion above the dividend and that the
decimal point is placed in the quo-
tient as soon as the mark in the divi-
dend is reached. The decimal point
in the quotient will come directly
over the mark in the dividend if
these precautions are observed.
There should be a figure in the quo-
tient over each figure used in the
dividend to the right of the mark.
If the dividend contains fewer
decimal places than the divisor has
ciphers should be annexed to the
dividend before beginning the divi-
sion.
Divide 1137.6 by .237.
4 800
.237)1137.600'
948
189 6
189 6
DECIMALS
65
These directions are summed up m
the rule: To divide by a decimal,
Mark off as many decimal places in
the dividend as there are decimal
places in the divisor, beginning at
the decimal point. Divide as in whole
numbers, placing each figure of the
quotient directly over the right hand
figure of the dividend used in obtain-
ing it. Place the decimal point in
the quotient as soon as the mark in
the dividend is reached.
Divide :
1. 21.76 by .32.
2. 4.462 by .046.
3. .1005 by .067.
4. .4984 by 5.6.
5. .051 by .85.
6. 395.52 by .0309.
7. 3495.9 by .0215.
8. 9.7696 by .172.
9. .16854 by .00795.
10. 2280.96 by .0324.
A complex decimal is handled in
division nearly the same as in mixed
numbers.
Divide 4.678 3 /7 by .08.
28433%
751
.08)4.67'8 3 /7
(Side Work:)
Divide :
1. 4.8973% by .7.
2. .3064%'! by .009.
3. .00639^ by 15.
4. .00429^ by 600.
5. .3097% by 2.7.
6. 265.384% by 7000.
If the dividend of a complex deci-
mal does not contain as many deci-
mal places as the divisor has, carry
the common fraction out as many
additional decimal places as are de-
sired.
Divide 4.83% 2 by .0017.
% 2 = .412/3, hence
.0017)4.8341'%
3 4
1 43
1 36
(Side Work)
74
68
61
51
10
Divide :
1. 76.5%! by .023.
2. .07y 14 by .7365.
3. 83^ by 6.295.
4. 24.0% by .0034.
If the divisor is a complex deci-
mal reduce both dividend and divisor
to fractions of the same denomina-
tor.
Divide .6795 by 2.43%.
2.43% .6795
X9 X9
21.89 6.1155
2052/
72189
21.89)6.11'55
4 378
1 7375
1 5323
2052
Divide .0792% by .174%.
.174J3 .0792%
X9 X9
1.569
.7133
1.569).713'30
627 6
85 70
78 45
7 25
66
ARITHMETIC
Divide
1. 6.573 by .07%.
2. 84.3 by .29^.
3. .573 by 2.8%!.
4. .643%! by 4%i.
5. 1.2195% by 2.3^.
6. 6.3% 2 by .36l;/S.
If there is a remainder after the
quotient has been carried the desired
number of decimal places the result
may be written as a complex deci-
mal, the remainder may be dropped,
or it may be noted and retained,
care being taken to place the deci-
mal point properly.
Divide 47.6 by 370, carrying the
result to three decimal places and
giving the remainder.
.1 28
370)47.60
37
10 6
7 4
3 20
2 96
. 24 Remainder
In the following examples carry
the result to three decimal places
and state what the remainder is.
Divide
1. .027 by 5.6.
2. 7.6 by .014.
3. .0068 by .235.
4. 900 by .0013.
5. .37 by 170.
6. 29.5 by .093.
Miscellaneous Exercises in Division.
Divide
1. 100 by .001.
2. .0003 by 3000.
3. 3240 by .027.
4. .00796 by 500.
5. .96064 by .32.
6. 425.92 by .605.
7. 3.4356 by 40.9.
8. 9101.57 by .0007.
9. 6660 by .074.
10. 6. 1472" by 6.8.
11. 4.67% 4 by .33.
12. 2.78142 by 3.07.
13. .265 by 6.7%.
14. 2.322 by 86.
15. .0003 by 1.
16. .0022 by 200.
FRACTIONAL PAHTS.
(1). To find 24 of a number, di-
vide it by 4 to get y\ of it, and mul-
tiply the quotient by 3.
Thus to find ft of 24.
y 4 of 24=6.
Then % of 24=18.
Other fractional parts of numbers
may be found in a similar manner.
Find % of 56.
i/l of 56=8.
Then % of 56=40.
Find:
% of 63.
J/s of 32.
% of 84.
% of 126.
% of 36.
6.
7.
9.
% of 70.
5/ 6 Of 50.
% of 21.
& of 42.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
This is virtually multiplying the
number by the fraction denoting the
part to be found.
Find % of 84.
% of 84=72 or %X 84=72.
Find by the last process:
1.
% of 54.
6.
% of 67.
2.
7 /n of 88.
7.
% of y n .
3.
5 Ao of 36.
8.
% of 5%.
4.
% of 14.
9.
n /s of 7%.
5.
% of 30.
(2). Find a number -'* larger
than 24. To do this find % o f the
number (24 in this example) and
add it to the number itself.
% of 24=16.
24 -f 16=40 Ans.
Find a number:
1. % larger than 65.
2. % larger than 42.
3. % larger than 63.
4. l % larger than 56.
5. % larger than 35.
6. % larger than 24;V,C.
FRACTIONAL PARTS
67
This class of problems may also be
solved as follows :
Find a number % larger than 63.
A number is once itself. Once a
number plus % of it=' i y 7 of it.
n/ 7 of 63=99.
Find a number:
1. % larger than 72.
2. % 2 larger than 30.
3. % larger than 27.
4. % larger than 28.
5. % larger than 12 / 25 .
6. % larger than 3%.
(3). Find a number % smaller
than 45.
% of 45=9.
459=36.
Find a number:
1. % smaller than 49.
2. %j smaller than 66.
3. % smaller than 54.
4. % smaller than 18.
5. % smaller than %.
6. % smaller than 46^.
Problems like these may also be
solved as follows :
Find a number % 2 less than 48
A number is once itself. Once a
number minus % 2 of it leaves % 2
of it.
-/^ of 48 = 28.
Find a number
L % smaller than 77.
2. y^ less than 40.
3. % 3 less than 120.
4. % less than 60.
5. % less than %.
6. % less than 22%.
PROBLEMS INVOLVING FRACTIONAL
PARTS.
1. Henry has 56 marbles and
James has % as many. How many
has James?
2. Mr. Mason had 42 tons of
dried prunes in 1912. Tn 1913 his
crop was % as large. What was his
crop in 1913?
3. He sold his prunes at $70 a
ton in 1912, and for y more per
ton in 1913. How much did he re-
ceive for each crop?
4. Raymond is 5 feet tall, Sher-
man is Yi-2 taller, and Homer is %
as tall as Sherman. How tall are
Sherman and Homer, respectively?
(Answer in feet and inches).
5. An apple tree bore 720 pounds
of fruit and the crop on a peach
tree was % lighter. A cherry tree
had a crop % heavier than that on
the peach tree. How many pounds
did the cherry tree bear?
6. A hog is worth $20. If a
sheep is worth % as much as a
hog, and a goat is worth % as much
as a sheep, what is the value of 75
hogs, 350 sheep and 12 goats?
7. A boat can run 24 miles an
hour, a passenger train can run %
faster, and an aeroplane can travel
% faster than the passenger train.
How long will it take each to travel
1200 miles?
8. A cubic foot of fresh water
weighs 1000 ounces and sea water
is % heavier. Find the weight in
pounds of a cubic yard of sea wa-
ter.
9. Cork is % lighter than fresh
water. Find the weight in pounds
of 50 cubic feet of cork.
10. A tree 9 feet tall increased
its height % each year for four
years. What was its height at the
end of the fourth year?
(4). 35 is % of what number?
If 5 / 7 of the number=35
Y 7 of the number= 7
% of the number=49
1. 48 is % of what number?
2. 36 is % of what number?
3. 24 is % of what number?
4. 54 is % of that number?
5. 231 is % of what number?
6. 15 is % of what number?
7. 25 is % of what number?
8. 12 / IS is %i of what number?
9. 8% is % of what number?
10. % is % of what number?
68
ARITHMETIC
The same result will be obtained
in examples like those just given by
dividing the number by the fraction
representing the part.
105 is % of what number?
1. 30 is % of what number?
2. 75 is % of what number?
3. 144 is 1( ?4 of what number?
4. 175 is % of what number?
5. 27 is % of what number?
6. 65 is %3 of what number?
7. 8% is % of what number?
8. J % 4 is % of what number?
(5). 30 is % greater than what
number? A number is % of itself.
Once a number plus % of it equals
% of it.
%+%=%
% of the number=30
% of the number=5
% of the number=25 Ans.
1. 84 is % greater than what no. r
2. 45 is % greater than what no.?
3. 56 is % greater than what no. ?
4. 120 is % greater than what no.?
5. 18 is Y G greater than what no.?
6. 8% is % greater than what no.?
7. 5y 2 is % greater than what no. ?
8. 1 %5 is Y 5 greater than what no.?
The work may be shortened by
division. 120 is % greater than
what number?
1.
% of the number = 120.
120 -H%= 75 Ans.
126 is % greater than
2. 264 is % greater than
3. 560 is
4.
greater than
585 is % greater than
180 is % greater than
. 26% is % greater than
7. 10V> is % greater than
is 5 / 7 greater than
8.
what no.?
what no. ?
what no.?
what no.?
what no. ?
what no. ?
what no.?
what no. #7
(6). 56 is % less than what num-
ber? A number is % of itself, and
if % of it is taken away, % will be
left.
% of the number=56.
% of the number=14.
% of the number=98 Ans.
1. 18 is y 3 less than what no.?
2. 120 is % less than what no.?
3. 252 is % less than what no ?
4. 84 is l / 7 less than what no.r
5. 7% is % less than what no.?
6. 4 %s is % less than what no.?
The process may be shortened by
division. 75 is % less than what
number ?
%-%=fi
% of the number= 75.
75-=-%=125 Ans.
1. 126 is % less than what no. ?
2. 48 is % less than what no.?
3. 36 is % less than what no. ?
4. 25 is % less than what no.?
5. 5% is % less than what no.?
6. % is % less than what no.?
PROBLEMS.
1. Mary has 45 cents, which is
% of what Helen has. How much
has Helen?
2. John has % as many marbles
as Herbert and they have together
56 marbles. How many has each?
3. Mr. Morgan raised 240 tons
of prunes and his crop was % larger
than Mr. Payne's. What was Mr.
Payne's crop?
4. The distance from Palo Alto
to San Francisco is % greater than
the distance from San Jose to Palo
Alto and the distance from San Jose
to San Francisco is 51 miles. What
is the distance from San Jose to
Palo Alto?
5. An orchard consisting of peach
trees and apricot trees contains 800
trees. There are % more peach
trees than apricot trees. How many
of each kind?
FRACTIONAL PARTS
69
6. Mary is 42 inches tall and she
is %! shorter than Hannah. How
tall is Hannah?
7. An oak was 75 feet tall. It
was % taller than a walnut and the
walnut was 2 /$ shorter than an eucal-
yptus. How tall was the eucalyp-
tus?
(7). 18 is what part of 24?
1 is % 4 of 24.
18 is 18 / 24 of 24.
1 %4=%- Hence 18 is % of 24.
As a rule the result is obtained di-
rectly by writing the result in frac-
tional form at once and reducing to
its lowest terms.
i% 4 =%. Hence 18 is % of 24.
28 is what part of 35?
2% 5 =y 5 . Hence 28 is ^ of 35.
42 is what part of 32?
42/ 32=2 y 16 . Hence 42 is ^ 6 o f 32.
What part of 18 is 27?
2% 8 =s/ 2- Hence 27 is % of 18.
Notice that the part, which be-
comes the numerator of the fraction,
is the subject of the sentence, and
that the whole, which becomes the
denominator of the fraction, is the
object of the preposition of.
1. 28 is what part of 42?
2. 36 is what part of 63?
3. 64 is what part of 48?
4. What part of 16 is 26.
5. 8 inches is what part of 3 feet?
6. 125 rd. is what part of a mile?
Fractions are handled in a similar
manner. 2^4 is what part of 22?
Hence 2^ is % of 22.
% is what part of 5j/j ?
= Ans.
/o
1. 4^ is what part of 6%?
2. , % is what part of 1^ ?
3. y z ft. is what part of % yd?
4. What part of 3 2 / 3 is 1#?
5. What part of l 5 / 7 is 4%?
6. What part o*- % yd. is ft ft?
(8). 63 is what part greater than
36?
It is necessary to find how much
it is greater.
6336=27, 2 % 6 =M- Hence 63
is % greater than 36.
54 is what part greater than 42?
5442=12, 1 % 2 = 2 /7, hence 54 is
% greater than 42.
Notice that the difference between
the two numbers is the part and be-
comes the numerator of the fraction,
and that the whole, which becomes
the denominator of the fraction, fol-
lows than.
75 is what part greater than 45?
75-^5=30, s % 5 = 2 / 3 . Hence 75
is % greater than 45.
1. 60 is what part greater than
42?
2. 75 is what part greater than
54?
3. 180 is what part greater than
80?
4. 1 % 6 is what part greater than
/ 2 ?
5. 9^4 is what part greater than
5^?
6. % is what part greater than
4 /n?
(9). 32 is what part less than
44?
It is necessary to find how much
32 is less than 44 first. 4432=12 ;
i%4=% 1 . Hence 32 is s /n less than
44.
36 is what part less than 56 ?
56 36 = 20, 2 % 6 = 5 /i4. Hence
the answer is % 4 .
Notice that the difference between
the numbers becomes the numerator
of the fraction, and that the whole,
which becomes the denominator, fol-
lows the word than.
64 is what part less
92 64 = 28, 2 %2 =
56 is what part
45 is what part
32 is what part
23 is what part
% is what part
3% is what part
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
than 92?
= % 3 , Ans.
less than 77?
less than 75?
less than 84?
less than 31?
less than %?
less than 5%?
70
ARITHMETIC
MISCELLANEOUS EXERCISES
FRACTIONAL PARTS.
IN
1. Find (1) 24 of 84; (2) a
number 1/4 greater than 84; (3) a
number 24 I GSS tnan 84.
2. (1) 84 is 24 of what number?
(2) 24 greater than what number?
(3) 24 l es s than what number?
3. (1) 56 is what part of 84?
(2) what part less than 84? (3)
84 is what part greater than 56?
4. 24 of 84 is 24 greater than
what number?
5. 24 of 84 is 24 ^ss than what
number ?
6. Find a number ll / s larger than
126.
7. 126 is !% larger than what
number ?
8. 75 is -/z smaller than what
number ?
9. Find a number % smaller than
75.
10. 100 is what part larger than
75?
PROBLEMS IN FRACTIONAL PARTS.
1. Mr. Stone bought a horse for
$120, and sold it for % of its cost.
How much did he gain?
2. Mr. Andrews sold a house for
$4800, which was % of its cost.
What was his gain?
3. Mr. Brown sold a bicycle for
$24, which was y$ less than its
cost. What was his loss?
4. A pole 28 feet long was
broken so that the length of one
part was 24 of the length of the
other. Find length of each part.
Let % = the length of the longer
part.
Then % = the length of the shorter
part.
And % = the length of the whole.
% of longer part=28 ft.
% of longer part= 4 ft.
% of longer part=16 ft. longer part.
% of longer part=12 ft. shorter part.
5. The sum of two numbers is
240 and the smaller is 2/5 of the
larger. Find each number.
6. The difference between two
numbers is 84, and the smaller is %
of the larger. Find each number.
7. The sum of three numbers is
132. The first is 24 of the second,
and the third is 1/5 of the first. Find
each number.
8. ^5 of Mary's age equals ^ of
Horace's, and the sum of their ages
is 24 years. How old is each?
Since % of Mary's age=% of
Horace's.
Y 5 of Mary's age=% of
Horace's.
And % of Mary's age=% of
Horace's.
Let %=Horace's age.
Then %=Mary's age.
And %=the sum of their ages.
Then % of Horace's age=24 years
l / 3 of Horace's age= 3 years
% of Horace's age= 9 years
Horace's age.
% of Horace's age=15 years
Mary's age.
9. An estate of $27940 is to be
shared by a brother and sister so
that Yz of the brother's share is
equal to ^ of the sister's. Find the
share of each.
10. Mary has 48 inches of ribbon.
She has % more than Susan, and
Susan has % more than Jane. How
many inches have Susan and Jane
respectively ?
Ans., S. 36 in.: J. 28 in.
11. There are 124 more boys than
girls at a certain school, and %
of the boys equals % of the g'ir!>.
How many students are there?
12. A certain orchard consisting
of apples, peaches and pear trees
contains 3600 trees; ^ of the apple
trees equals *4 of the peach trees,
and l /4 of the peach trees equals r A
of the pear trees. How many trees
of each kind does the orchard con-
tain?
PERCENTAGE
71
13. Hannah is 60 inches tall. She
is % shorter than John, and John is
l /3 taller than Emily. How tall is
Emily? Ans., 54 in.
PERCENTAGE.
(1) To Express Per Cent as a Decimal.
Per cent means hundredths. If
the per cent contains no decimal or
fractional part, its is only necessary
to point off two decimal places and
omit the character (%), or word
per cent.
27% = .27; 3 per cent = .03;
285% = 2.85
Express the following decimally:
1. 7%.
2. 65%.
3. 495%.
4. 2 per cent.
5. 4000 per cent.
6. 967 per cent.
7. 800%.
8. 40%.
9. 100%.
10. 5384%.
11. 478%.
12. 198%.
If the per cent contains a decimal
part move the decimal point two
places to the left and omit the char-
acter.
Express decimally:
1. .6%.
2. 4.7%.
3. .25%.
4. 46.5%.
5. 895.37%.
6. .003%.
7. .09 per cent.
8. 4.9 per cent.
9. .0079 per cent.
If the per cent contains a com-
mon fraction express it as a com-
plex decimal and reduce the result-
ing expression to a pure or mixed
decimal, if possible.
5y & %=. 05^=. 05125.
=. OQ3/7.
Express decimally :
2. y 25 %.
3. 43%%.
5. 6y 16 %.
6. 247y 5 o%.
7. .7% %.
8. .0% 25 %.
9. 200%%.
10. .6%!%.
11. 268%%.
12. .18%%.
(2) To Express Per Cent as a Common
Fraction.
In general it is best to change
the per cent to a decimal and then
change that result to a common frac-
tion and reduce to its lowest terms.
15%=.15=i% 00 = 3 /2o;
Express as a common fraction in
its lowest terms :
1. 48%. 7. 260%.
2. 225%. 8. 7Y 7 %.
3. 4.5%. 9. .0%%.
4. .025%. 10. 33^%.
5. .6^%. 11. .33%%.
6. .055/7%. 12. 3.3%%.
The work may be shortened by
omitting the decimal form, being
careful to annex the two ciphers to
the denominator in place of the char-
acter, %.
%= 8 %000= 17 /1200.
Express as a common fraction in
its lowest terms:
1. 13%%.
2. .6%%.
3. .0%%.
4. 7y 7 %.
5. 22%%.
6. 4.5%!%.
7. .57y 7 %.
8. 76%%.
9. 400%%.
10. %%.
Some per cents freuqently used
reduce to small fractions. Pupils
should become so familiar with these
that they will readily recognize them.
For example, 25%=%; 50%=%;
Reduce to common fractions:
1. 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%,.
60%, 70%, 80%, 90%.
2. 8%%, 16%%, 33%%,66%%.-
72
ARITHMETIC
3. Count by 12^ to 100, begin-
ning with I2y 2 . Write the character
% after each result and reduce to a
common fraction in its lowest terms.
4. Count by 8Ys from 8 l / 3 to
100, annexing the character % after
each result and reduce as in exer-
cise 3.
5. Count by 11% to 100 and treat
the results as in exercise 3.
6. Count by 14% to 100 and treat
the results as in exercise 3.
(3) To Find a Given Per Cent of a
Number.
As a rule it is best to express the
per cent as a decimal and multiply
the given number by it.
Find 17% of 7658.
7658
.17
53606
7658
1301.86 Ans.
Find 73/s% of 47.85.
47.85
.076
28710
3 3495
3.63660
Find 6 4 / 7 % of 375.
375
06%
7)1500
214%
2250
24.64%
Find by the method here used:
1. 2 / 3 % of 867.
2. 128% of 42.5.
3. 800% of 375.
4. 25% of 6.96.
5. Y 4 % of 7651.
6. .8%% of 7965.
If the per cent reduces to a small
fraction it is usually best to use the
fraction.
Find 16%% of 894.
Yt, of 894=149 Ans.
Find 62%% of 6.256. 62^ = # ;
5/ 8 of 6.256=3.910 Ans.
Find by using fractions :
1. 75% of 788.
2. 83%% of 35.4.
3. 36%!% of 4.632.
4. 20y 7 % of 238.
5. 87^% of 38.
6. 77%% of 127%.
Find by the easiest method:
1. %% of 6545.
2. ft% of 6752.
3. 12%% of 47.31.
4. 150% of y 8 -
5. 3X% of 4%.
6. 4%% of 1.65%.
(4). To find a number a given per
cent larger than a given number.
To do this it is only necessary to
find the per cent of the number and
add this to the number.
Find a number 15% greater than
486.
15%=. 15.
486
.15
2430
486
486
72.90
558.90 Ans
72.90
or since a number is 100% of itself,
100%-fl5%=115%.
4 86
1.15
24 30
48 6
486
558.90 Ans.
Find a number 16%% greater
than 593.
16%%=%; % of 593=98%.
593 plus 98%=691% Ans.
In what follows use whatever plan
seems shortest.
PERCENTAGE
73
Find a number :
1. 17% larger than 27.
2. 275% larger than 654.
3. 2%% larger than 1440.
4. 66%% larger than 216.
5. %% larger than 945.
6. y & % larger than 674.
(5). To find a number a given per
cent less than a given number.
The process is identical with that
of (4) except that after the required
per cent is found, decimally or oth-
erwise, it is subtracted from the or-
iginal number.
Find a number 24% less than 575.
24%=. 24.
575 575
.24 138
2300
1150
138.000
or 100% 24% = 76%
575
.76
437 Ans.
= .76.
3450
4025
437.00 Ans.
Find a number 37^ % less than
645.
37^%=3^ ; 3/ s of 645=241^.
645 241#=403J* Ans.
100% 37^%=62^%=^ ;
y & of 645=403^ Ans.
In what follows, use the method
which seems shortest.
Find a number:
1. 26% less than 182.
2. 3.7% less than 579.
3. %% less than 837.
4. 33>S% less than 548.
5. 62,3% less than 759.
.0 3 / 7 % less than 2681.
Problems.
6.
1. Sea water is 2.7% heavier
than fresh water, and a cubic foot
of fresh water weighs 62% pounds.
Find the weight of a cubic yard of
sea water.
2. Ice is 7% lighter than fresh
water. Find the weight of 100 cu-
ft. of ice.
3. An orchard contains 600 peach
trees. There are 60% more prune
trees than peach trees ; 60% fewer
apple trees than peach trees, and
the number of pear trees is 60% of
the number of peach trees. How
many trees does the orchard contain?
4. Mrs. Kammerer put 1200 eggs
in an incubator. 95% of the eggs
hatched and 60% of the chicks were
pullets. She sold 75% of the roost-
ers. How many chickens remain ?
5. A tree 8 feet tall increased its
height 25% each year for 4 years.
What was its height at the end of
the fourth year?
6. Mr. Burton bought a house for
$4500 and afterward sold it at an
advance of 10% on its cost. The
purchaser sold it at an advance of
10% and the last purchaser sold at
a reduction of 20%. What was the
last selling price?
7. A city whose population was
1200 in 1900 increased in popula-
tion 275% in ten years. At this rate
of increase, what will its population
be in 1920?
8. 2.55% of the weight of sea
water is salt. How much salt can
be obtained from 16000 cubic yards
of sea water?
9. The waters of Salt Lake are
20% heavier than fresh water and
13% of this weight is common salt.
The area of the lake is 2500' sq.
miles, and its average depth is 20
ft. How many tons of salt does the
lake contain?
(6) To find a number when a
certain per cent of it is given.
In finding a given per cent of a
number the number is multiplied by
74
ARITHMETIC
the per cent expressed decimally or
as a common fraction.
The per cent of a number, then,
is the product and the number and
the per cent are factors. Hence to
find a number when a certain per
cent of it is given, it is only neces-
sary to divide the given per cent of
the number by the per cent expressed
either decimally or as a fraction.
834 is 15% of what number?
. 15.
55 60
.15)834.00
826 is 8iy 2 % of what number?
y% of the number=826.
y>, of the number 119.
% of the number=952.
(or 826-i-%=:952.)
In the following exercises express
the per cent decimally:
1. 731 is 17% of what number?
2. 378 is 135% of what number?
3. 1045 is 8>4% of what number?
4. 684 is 4%% of what number?
5. 12.25 is .3%% of what number?
6. 8715 is 275% of what number?
In the following problems express
the per cent as a fraction :
L 483 is 87j^% of what num-
ber?
2. 895 is 16^ % of what num-
ber?
3. 764 is 44%% of what num-
ber?
4. 287 is 37^% of what number?
5. 5.754 is 162^ % of what num-
ber?
6. 687 is 2 /z% of what number?
(7). To find a number when a
certain per cent more than it is giv-
en.
Since any number is once itself,
or 100% of itself, it is only neces-
sary to add the given per cent, ex-
pressed either decimally or as a
fraction to 1 similarly expressed, and
divide the given number by this sum.
729 is 35% greater than what
number ?
100%-f 35%=135% ;
135%=1. 35.
5 40 Ans.
1.35)729.00'
675
54
54
594 is 3iy 2 % greater than what
number ?
37^%=^; 1+^=1%. 1% of
number=594. 594-^ 11 / 8 =432 Ans.
In the following use whichever
method seems shortest:
1. 996 is 33y 3 % more than what
number ?
2. 1764 is 2254% more than what
number ?
3. 29.07 is 11214% more than
what number?
4. 1.397 is 46^% more than
what number?
5. 601.5 is 54% more than what
number ?
6. 28105 is y & % more than what
number ?
(8). To find a number when a
certain per cent less than it is given.
Subtract given per cent from
100% and expressing the given re-
sult decimally, divide the given num-
ber by it.
396 is 45% less than what num-
ber?
100% 45%=55% ;55%=.55.
7 20 Ans
.55)396.00'
385
11
11
56.73 is 57%% less than what
number ?
100% 57!/ 7 %=426/ 7 % ;
42%%==%.
% of number=56.73.
56. 73-^-%=! 32. 37.
PERCENTAGE
75
Use the method that seems short-
est in the following examples.
1. 103 is 15% less than what
number ?
2. 894 is 33 l /3% less than what
number ?
3. 4695 is 3T/2 % less than what
number ?
4. % 9 is 62^% less than what
number ?
5. 173.92 is 2%% less than what
number ?
6. 156.6 is 3y 3 % less than what
number ?
Problems.
1. 1173 is 15% of what number?
15% greater than what number?
15% less than what number?
2. Pine wood is 55% lighter than
water. How many cubic feet in a
ton of pine wood?
3. What is the weight of 1000
feet of pine lumber?
4. Mr. Reynolds had 25% more
prunes than Mr. Leonard, and Mr.
Woodham had 10% more than Mr.
Reynolds. They had together 3996
tons. How much had each?
5. Mr. Munroe left $15290 to his
three children, Henry, Mary and
Susan. He gave Mary 30% more
than Henry and Susan V2, l / 2 % less
than Mary. How much did he give
each?
6. Milk is 3.2% heavier than wa-
ter. How much should a gallon (231
cu. in.) of milk weigh?
7. A tree increased its height
20% each year for four years and was
then 54 feet tall. How tall was it at
first ?
8. Mrs. Stewart is 12% shorter
than her husband and the sum of
their . height is 117V. inches. Find
the height of each.
9. Mr. Simpson sold a horse los-
ing 10% of its cost. With the mon-
ey he bought another which he sold
at a loss of 10%. His total loss was
$23.75. What did the first horse cost?
10. Mr. Johnson sold a house at a
loss of 30% on the cost: with the
money he bought another which he
sold at a gain of 30% on its cost.
His net loss was $432. Find the
cost of each house.
(9). To express a decimal as per
cent.
Since per cent means hundredths
it is only necessary, if the number
consists of two decimal places, to
omit the decimal point and use the
character %.
Thus, . 17=17% ; . 03i4=3y 7 % j
3.67=367%.
If the expression contains less
than two decimal places, extend it to
two places, omit the point, and use
the character as before.
Thus, 3.7=3.70=370%.
.63/ 11 =.62% 1 =62% 1 %.
4^=4.60=460%.
.7%5=.70% 7 =70% 7 %.
If there are more than two deci-
mal places in the expression move
the decimal point two places to the
right and introduce the character.
Thus, .364=36.4% or 36%%;
.0475=4.75% or 4%%;
.007%=.7% or i% 8 %.
Express the following as per cent:
1. 2.042/ 7 . 9. % B0 .
2. 20.42/ 7 . 10. .OOOW
3. 2042/7. 1L .07/250.
4. .2042/ 7 . 12. .007/250.
5. .8%25- 13- -0025.
6. 8 3 / 125 . 14. 225.
7. .008 3 /i25- 15. -1225.
8. .08 3 / 123 . 16. 12.25.
(10). To express a common frac-
tion as per cent.
It is only necessary to reduce the
fraction to a decimal of at least two
decimal places and then use the char-
acter % instead of two decimal plac-
es.
Thus, % 8 =.277/ 9 =277/ 9 %.
%25=-0064=.64%.
81^=2.025=202.5%.
76
ARITHMETIC
Express the following fractions as
per cent:
1.
i% 5 .
9.
0/4.
2.
163 /80.
10.
.00%.
3.
4%e-
11.
%.
4.
.9%.
12.
.oooy 7 .
5.
3.7^.
13.
.50% 9 .
6.
3 /77-
14.
5.0% 9 .
7.
49% 5 .
15.
50% .
8.
7.0% 4 .
16.
.054.
(11). To find what per cent one
number is of another.
It will be seen that this is similar
to (7) of fractional parts. First ex-
press the relation in the form of a
fraction, and then change the frac-
tion to per cent.
15 is what per cent of 48?
i% 8 =. 3125=31. 25% or 31%%.
27 is what per cent of 67?
= 40 2 % 7 % Ans.
4020/ 67
67)27.00
26 8
20
Find what per cent:
1. 65 is of 125.
2. 88 is of 160.
3. 629 is of 125.
4. 43% is of 19.
5. 84 is of 217%].
6. 7 is of 1250.
7. 4% 2 is of 16%.
8. 59% is of 84%.
9. 6.75 is of 27.5.
10. 7.4 is of 2.75.
11. .674 is of 25.
12. 56.4 is of 25.
(12). .To find what per cent one
number is greater than another.
This is similar to (8) in fraction-
al parts. First find how much one
number is greater than the other,
then find what per cent this differ-
ence is of the other number.
87 is what per cent greater than
75?
8775=12.
.16
75)12.00
7 5
7 5
4 50
4 50
.16=16% Ans.
478 is what per cent greater than
58?
478 _ 58 = 420 ;
7.24% 9
58)420.00
406
14
11 6
2 40
2 32
% 8 =% 9 .
7.24y 29 =724% 9 % Ans.
% is what per cent greater than
%? %-%=%*;
Ans.
Find what per cent:
1. 49 is greater than 40? *
2. 88 is greater than 30?
3. 126 is greater than 125?
4. % is greater than %?
5. 4% is greater than 3%r
6. 76.4 is greater than 7.64?
(13). To find what per cent one
number is less than another?
This is similar to (9) in fraction-
al parts. First find how much it is
less than the other number, and then
divide this difference by that num-
ber.
45 is what per cent less than 60?
6045=15
.2 5
60)1 '5.0
.25=25% Ans.
PERCENTAGE
77
2.15 is what per cent less than
3.6?
3.62.15=1.45
3.6)1.4'50
144
10
Ans.
Find what per cent:
1. 147 is less than 250?
2. 265 is less than 625?
3. .0475 is less than .475?
4. 3% is less than 6%?
5. % is less than %?
6. .6% is less than 4%?
In solving concrete problems the
per cent should always be connected
with some object which is the base,
or 100 per cent. For example, m
problem "3" below Mary's age is the
base.
Solution.
Let 100 per cent = Mary's age.
Then 125 per cent John's age
and 225 per cent = the sum of
their ages.
225 per cent of Mary's age equal
36 years.
Hence Mary's age = 16 years.
and John's age =20 years.
Per cents cannot be added or sub-
tracted in the concrete unless they
are per cents of the same thing. 4
per cent of a yard, 5 per cent of a
foot, and 6 per cent of an inch can
be added only after they have been
changed to per cents of the same
unit.
4 per cent yd. plus 5 per cent ft.
plus 6 per cent in. equal 12 per cent
ft. plus 5 per cent ft. plus .5 per cent
ft. equal 17.5 per cent ft.
It is best to state the preliminary
work in concrete problems fully and
explicitly. The solution of problem
"5" below is here given as an exam-
pie.
Solution.
Let 100 per cent = William's
share.
Then 120 per cent = Samuel's
share
and 180 per cent = Homer's
share.
400 per cent = the sum of shares.
400 per cent of William's share
= $400.
Hence William's share = $100.
Samuel's share = $120.
Homer's share = $180.
PROBLEMS.
A number which is 20% great-
er than 180 is 25% less than what
number? Ans., 288.
2. The number which is 25% less
than 180 is 25% greater than what
number? Ans., 108.
3. John is 25% older than Mary,
and the sum of their ages is 36 years.
How old is each? Ans., M. 16; T.
20.
4. Mary is 40% younger than
John and the sum of their ages is
40 years. How old is each? Ans..
M. 15; J. 25.
5. Samuel has 20% more money
than William, and Homer has 50%
more than Samuel. They have to-
gether $400. How much has each?
Ans., W. $100 ; S. $120 : H. $180.
6. Mary has 20% more chickens
than Susan, and Helen has 33%%
fewer than Mary. They have to-
gether 360 chickens. How many has
each? Ans., M. 144; S. 120; H. 96.
7. Mr. Macy's 1909 crop of prunes
was 20% less than his 1908 crop,
and his 1910 crop was 50% more
than his 1909 crop. His 1910 crop
exceeded his 1908 crop by 6 tons.
How much was his 1910 crop? Ans.,
36 tons.
8. Mr. Bishop's fruit crop was
20% less than Mr. King's, and Mr.
Ball's crop was 50% more than
Mr. Bishop's. Mr. Ball had 7 tons
more than Mr. King. How much
had each? Ans., K. 35 tons: Bi. 28
tons ; Ba. 42 tons.
78
ARITHMETIC
9. If cloth loses 10% of its
length in washing and dyeing, how
much unwashed and undyed cloth is
required to make 360 yards of cloth
after it is washed and dyed? Ans.,
400 yards.
10. Mr. Wise bought clothing at
$16 a suit, and wishes to sell it at a
gain of 15%. How should he mark
it so that he may reduce the price
8% and still gain the 15%? Ans.,
$20.
11. A tree increased its height
50% the first year, was then cut back
20%, and the second year increased
its height 33%%, when its full height
was 8 feet. How high was it at
first? Ans., 5 feet.
12. Mr. Slocum increased his
weight 20%, then lost 25%, then
gained 50%. He now weighs 216
Ibs. How much did he formerly
weigh? Ans., 160 Ibs.
13. Mr. Schley sold his cow for
$43.20. He had asked 50% more
than the cost, and sold for 10% less
than the asking price. What was his
gain? Ans., Gain, $11.20.
14. If cloth shrinks 12%% of its
length in washing and dyeing, what
is gained in selling 840 yards of
shrunken cloth bought unshrunken at
30c a yard, and sold at 40c, the cost
of washing and dyeing being $4.50?
Ans., $43.50.
15. Mr. Hale marked his suits at
20% above cost, and sold them at
a discount of 10% at $14.85 each.
What was his profit on 250 suits?
Ans., $275.
16. Lean hogs are bought at 8c a
pound, and fat rogs are sold at 9c,
and it costs 5c for every pound a
hog increases in weight. Mr. Cran-
dall bought 150 lean hogs averaging
200 pounds each, and increased their
weight 25%, then sold them. How
much did he make? Ans., $600.
17. If cloth shrinks 12% of its
length in washing and dyeing, how
many yards of unshrunken cloth are
required to make 22 suits, each suit
requiring 12 yards of cloth after it
is washed and dyed? Ans., 300
yds.
18. Mr. Hardy raised 29,280 Ibs.
of prunes in 1910. His 1910 crop
was 20% less than his 1909 crop,
and the crop of 1909 was 20% more
than that of 1908. How much was
his 1908 crop? Ans., 30,500 Ibs.?
19. Dried peaches gain 10% in 1
weight in processing. Find the prof-
it on a shipment of 22 carloads of
15 tons each of processed fruit sold
at 9c a pound ; the unprocessed fruit
was bought at 7c a pound, and the
cost of packing and shipping was
$250 per car. Commission at 4%
was paid both for buying and sell-
ing. Ans.. $7,844.
20. A cubic centimeter of water
weighs one gram. Gold is 19.3 and
silver 10.5 times as heavy as water.
What is the weight of 48 cubic cen-
timeters of an alloy of gold and sil-
ver of which 75% is gold? Ans.,
820.8 gr.
21. Sea water is 2.6% heavier
than fresh water. How much will
the alloy mentioned in problem 20
weigh if suspended in sea water?
Ans., 771.552 gr.
22. Mr. Thompson's fruit crop in
1911 is 80% of his crop in 1910. the
price is 50% higher, and the expense
of handling 10% higher. He had 35
tons in 1910, for which he received
$75 a ton and paid $5 a ton for
handling. What will his 1911 crop
net him? Ans., $2,996.
23. An aviator traveled a certain
rate the first hour, increased his
speed 20% the second hour, de-
creased it 20% the third hour, and
increased it 20% the fourth hour.
He traveled 57.6 miles the fourth
hour. How far did he travel? Ans.,
215.6 mi.
24. It is 28 miles from San Jose
to Mount Hamilton. A carriage
travels 75% faster coming down than
going up. A carriage leaves San
Jose at 11 o'clock, remains at the
PERCENTAGE
79
summit 3 hours, and returns at 1
a. m. What are the rates of travel
up and back? Ans., 4 mi.; 7 mi.
25. The hind wheel is 15% larger
than the fore wheel on a carriage.
How many revolutions will each
make while the fore wheel is gaining
45 revolutions? Ans., 300; 345.
26. Mr. Barnes sold his farm for
$12.340. He had asked 25% more
than the farm cost, and sold at a
reduction of 12% on the asking
price. What was the gain? Ans.,
$1,121.82.
27. Mr. Wells bought a house and
lot for $4.800. He placed it on sale
at 50% above cost, sold at a re-
duction of 20% on the asking price,
and paid 5% of the selling price to
the agent. What was the gain?
Ans., $672.
.28. Mr. Wilson purchased 40 A.
of land at $75 an acre, and bought
3,600 orange trees at 60c each. 5%
of the trees are found to be worth-
less, and 20% of the remainder died.
He paid 25c each for having the
trees set out, and $5 an acre each
year for cultivation. What was t
cost per living tree, including the
land, in four years? Ans., $2.45.
29. Mr. Curtner sold his crop of
prunes in 1912 for $4,704. He had
40 tons of French prunes. His crop
of Silver prunes was 20% smaller
and the price per ton 20% higher
than the French prunes. At what
price per ton did he sell each? Ans..
F. $60; S. $72.
30. Mr. Jackson's live stock is
valued at $3.200. Forty per cent of
his animals are goats, 35% sheep,
and the remainder hogs. A goat is
worth y as much as a sheep, and
a sheep is worth y^ as much as a
hog. Find the value of each kind of
stock. Ans.. $900 g. : $1,050 sh. ;
$1,250 h.
31. A hall committee paid $940.80
for 672 yards of carpet. It bought
12 per cent more carpet than was
needed and the price paid per yard
was 12 per cent higher than it
should have been. How much
should the carpet have cost? Ans.
$750.
32. Green peaches lose 85 per
cent of their weight in drying, and
dried peaches gain 10 per cent in
weight in preparation for packing.
It costs $5 per green ton for pick-
ing and drying peaches and $2.40
per ton of packed fruit for packing.
What are the net proceeds of 57^4
tons of packed fruit sold at 7c a
pound? Ans. $6196.40.
33. Twenty per cent of an army
were killed in battle, 30 per cent of
the remainder died of wounds. The
number which died of wounds ex-
ceeded the number killed in battle,
472. How many were left in the
army? Ans. 6608.
34. If cloth shrinks one-ninth of
its length in washing and dyeing,
what is the gain in selling 720 yards
of dyed cloth, bought undyed at 30
cts. a yard and sold after being dyed
at 40 cts. a yard, if the cost of wash-
ing and dyeing is $4.50?
Ans., $40.50.
35. The outer walls of a building
contain 5040 square feet, and each
strip of rustic overlaps one-eighth of
the width of another. What will be
the cost of the rustic and painting
for the building, if the rustic costs
$35 a thousan d and the painting
costs 30 cts, a square yard?
Ans., $369.60.
36. If six pounds of green coffee
make five pounds of dried, and green
coffee is bought at 22 cts a pound
and roasted coffee is sold at 30 cts.
a pound, how much is gained by
selling 1200 pounds of roasted coffee
if the cost of roasting that amount
is $2.75? Ans., $40.45.
BUSINESS CUSTOMS.
The application of percentage to
different lines of business should be
presented mainly from the informa-
tion standpoint. The pupil will be
80
ARITHMETIC
interested in an application only
when he sees that it in some way
touches the neighborhood interests.
While he should be encouraged to
find out for himself the prevailing
business customs, the teacher should
see that these customs are fully and
clearly stated, and that they are
learned.
Loss and Gain.
1. Loss or gain is reckoned on
the cost.
2. Cost is 100 per cent for reck-
oning loss or gain.
3. Selling price is more than 100
per cent when there is gain.
3a. Selling price is less than 100
per cent when there is loss.
The pupil should assist in mak-
ing statements 2 and 3.
Trade Discount.
1. The First Discount is reck
oned on the list price; the Second
Discount is reckoned on the first
proceeds, and so on.
2. The List Price is 100 per cent
for reckoning the first discount.
3. The First Proceeds is less
than 100 per cent for first discount.
It is 100 per cent for reckoning
the second discount, etc.
Commission in Selling.
1. Commission is reckoned on
the selling price.
2. The Selling price is 100 per
cent for reckoning commission.
3. The Proceeds is less than 100
per cent.
Collections and similar transactions
are on the same basis as selling on
commission.
Commission in Buying.
1. Commission is reckoned on
the purchase price. (That paid by
the agent.)
2. The purchase price is 100 per
cent for reckoning commission.
3. The entire cost is more than
100 per cent.
Property Insurance.
When this topic is taken up there
should be a general discussion of the
subject, as regards value, face of
policy, premium, risk, etc.
Fire insurance is usually quoted
as so many cents a year on the hun-
dred dollars. The three year rate
is double the one year rate, the five
year rate is three times annual rate.
The agent usually receives 15 per
cent commission on the amount of
premiums collected, and all the pol-
icy fee when one is charged. The
premium is reckoned on the face
value of the policy.
Life Insurance.
Discuss fraternal insurance and
insurance companies. Also accident
policies, endowment policies, straight
life policies, who may and who may
not be insured, etc.
The premium is usualy reckoned
as so many dollars per thousand on
the face value of the policy, payable
annually, quarterly, or monthly as
the case may be.
Taxes and Duties.
Discuss import duties, internal
revenue, poll tax, property tax, their
purpose, aim, and manner of collec-
tion.
The facts concerning property
taxes in California are as follows:
1. Between the first Monday in
March and the last day of June of
each year, each property owner must
furnish the assessor with a list ot
the property owned by him at noon
on the first Monday of March.
2. During the month of July the
County Board of Supervisors sits as
a Board of Equalization. It ex-
amines the valuations made by the
assessor and his deputies and raises
PERCENTAGE
81
cr lowers any valuations as it may
think proper. The property owner
has the right to go before the Board
and ask that his assessment be low-
ered, or show cause why it should
not be raised.
3. In August the State Board of
Equalization examines the assess-
ments of the counties, and raises or
lowers any county assessment as it
may think proper. Each county has
a right to be heard thru its super-
visors.
The State Board also places a
valuation on the railway property of
the State, and apportions this valu-
ation among the counties in proper-
tion to the number of miles of track-
in each county.
It also fixes the State tax rate.
4. In September the Board of
Supervisors fixes the county and
city tax rates.
5. The Auditor calculates the tax
of each individual and must have his
work completed by the second Mon-
day in October.
6. Taxes are payable to the Tax
Collector in two installments. The
first installment consists of all the
tax on personal property, and half
the tax on real estate. It is delin-
quent if not paid on or before the
last Monday in November, and a
penalty of 15 per cent is added.
The second installment is half the
tax on real estate and is delinquent
if not paid on or before the last
Monday in April and 5 per cent is
added to all taxes remaining unpaid.
If not paid before the delinquent
tax list is published a charge of 50
cents is added for each piece of
property delinquent. If not paid the
property is sold to the State.
The teacher should show the pu-
pils an assessment blank and a tax
receipt, also a delinquent tax list.
In solving problems in loss and
gain, commission, etc., the work
should be written in good business
form. Business blanks, bill heads,
and ruled journal and ledger paper
should be used when practicable.
The required multiplications and di-
visions should be performed as side
work, and in the additions and sub-
tractions the decimal points should
be kept in the same vertical column,
and when there are several items 01
debits and credits double columns
should be used.
A few models are here given.
1. Mr. Copeland marked his
suits 40 per cent above cost and sold
them at 10 per cent discount on the
marked price, receiving $24.57 each.
How much was his profit on 50
suits ?
Let 100 per cent equal cost of one
suit.
Then 140 per cent equals marked
price.
14 per cent equals reduction,
126 per cent equals selling price.
126 per cent of cost equals $24.57
cost of one suit equals . . . .$19.50
gain on suit equals . . .
gain on 50 suits equals. .
Side work.
$19.50
...$ 5.07
..$253.50
1.26) 24. 57' 00
12.6
1197
1134
630
630
$5.07
50
$253.50
2. Miss Wise bought a lot for
$840 and built a house costing
$2800. She rents the house at $35
a month and pays $1.60 a month for
water, $55 a year for taxes and in-
surance on 24 of the cost of the
house at an annual rate of 45c.
What per cent does her investment
net her?
Solution.
Receipts.
Rent for 12 months $420
82
ARITHMETIC
Expenses.
Water for 12 months $19.20
Taxes 55 . 00
Insurance . 9.45 83.65
Net receipts $336 . 35
Cost of property $3640
Rate of interest 9.2 per cent
Side work.
.092
3640)336.350
327 6
8 75
7 28
1 47
3. Mr. Harmon is assessed $12400
on real estate and $950 on personal
property. The tax rate is $1.76. He
pays all his taxes May 2nd. How
much does he pay ?
y 2 real estate tax $109 . 12
Personal property 16 . 72
First Installment 125.84
Second Installment 109 . 12
Penalty first installment . . 25 . 168
Penalty second installment. 5.456
Amt. paid $265.58
4. A commission merchant sold
on commission of 5 per cent 500
sacks, 55,000 Ibs. of potatoes @
$1.20 per C. ; 600 melons @ $9.25
per C. He paid $45 freight and
$8.50 drayage. Find the amount
due the consignor.
55000 Ib. potatoes
@ 1.20 per C... $660. 00
600 melons
@ 9.25 per C... 55.50 $715.50
Commission at 5% 35.78
Freight 45 ...
Drayage 8.50 89.28
Balance $626.22
Problems.
1. Mr. Barnes sold his farm for
$12,340. He had asked 25% more
than the farm cost, and sold at a
reduction of 12% on the asking
price. What was the gain? Ans.,
$1,121.82.
2. Mr. Wells bought a house ana
lot for $4,800. He placed it on sale
at 50% above cost, sold it at a re-
duction of 20% on the asking price,
and paid 5% of the selling price to
the agent. What was the gain?
Ans., $672.
3. Mr. Johnson bought 576 sacks
of potatoes at $1.20 a sack. 12^%
of them spoiled. At what price per
sack must he sell the remainder to
realize a profit of 16%% on the
whole investment? Ans., $1.60.
4. Mr. Johnson bought 576 sacks
of potatoes at $1.20 per sack. 16%%
of them had to be sold at a loss of
25%. At what price per sack must
the remainder be sold to realize a
profit of 20% on the whole invest-
ment? Ans., $1.548.
5. Mr. Conkling bought 500 box-
es of oranges at $1.20 per box.
40% being large, were sold at a
profit of 12j/a%. At how much per
box must the rest be sold to realize
a profit of 25% on the whole in-
vestment? Ans., $1.60.
6. Mr. Stockton and Mr. Thomp-
son each agreed to sell 7,038 sacks
of grain. It was found that Mr.
Stockton had underestimated his crop
20% and Mr. Thompson had over-
estimated his crop 20%. How much
has each? Ans., S. 8,797.5; T.
5,865.
7. Mr. A purchased a mower list-
at $160, at 30 and 15 off. He paid
an agent 5% for making the pur-
chase, and freight of $6.25. He sold
the machine at 10% off the list price.
What was the gain? Ans.. $37.79.
8. Mr. B sold a house for $7,500,
which was 25% more than it cost.
He paid an agent 5% for making-
the sale. With the proceeds he
bought another, which was after-
ward sold at a loss of 10%, no com-
mission. What was the net loss or
gain? Ans., $412.50.
PERCENTAGE
9. Mr. Hale bought a house for
$4,200, and spent $300 for repairs.
He offered it for sale at $7,000, and
aferward sold it at a reduction of
10%, and paid his agent 5% com-
mission. How much did Mr. Hale
make? Ans., $1,485.
10. Mrs. Prim bought a house
for $3,600 and spent $200 in altera-
tions and repairs. She pays a yeai-
ly tax at $2.50 on an assessed valu-
ation of $2,250, insurance on the
three years' plan on $2,500 at the
annual rate of $.45, and a monthly
water rate of $1.80. If the house
is kept rented at $35 a month, what
per cent does the investment net
her? Ans., 8.8%.
11. Mr. Clark bought a store at
$8,000 which he rents at $100 a
month. He pays insurance at $1.10
on $6,000, taxes at $2.55 on $4,800,
and estimates a yearly repair bill of
$100. What per cent does the in-
vestment net him? Ans., 11.4%.
12. Mr. Martin bought a horse
for $125, offered it for sale at 40%
above cost, and sold it at a reduction
of 10%. He paid an agent 5% for
making the sale, and $12.50 for oth-
er expenses. How much did he
gain? Ans., $12.13.
13. Mrs. Dawson offered her
house for sale at 25% above cost,
and afterward sold it at a reduction
of 12%. The agent got 5% corn-
mission, and she received $4,723.40.
What did she make or lose? Ans.,
$203.40 gain.
14. Mr. Buell bought a carriage
listed at $500, receiving discounts of
25 and 10 off and paying an agent
5% for making the purchase and
$12.50 freight. He sold the carriage,
at 15% discount on the list price,
paying an agent 4%. What was his
gain? Ans., $41.12.
15. A house was kept insured on
the three years' plan for $2,500 at
an annual rate of 45c. It burned
the eleventh year. Find the cost of
insurance, including a policy fee of
$1 for each issuance of his policy.
Ans., $94.
16. How much did the agent
make and how much did the com-
pany receive from the transactions
in problem, fifteen? Ans., A. $17.50;
Co. $76.50.
17. Mr. Kirk bought a lot for
$800 and built a house costing
$2,400, insures his house for $2,000
at 50c, pays taxes at $2.60 on an
assessed valuation of $1,920. For
how much per month must he rent
the house to realize 8% net on his
money? Ans., $26.33.
18. Mr. A bought a piano listed
at $800 at 40 and 20 off. lie paid
an agent 10% for purchasing, and
paid $45 for freight. He sold it at
15% discount. What was the gain?
Ans., $212.60.
19. Mr. Christie bought a piano
listed at $700 at 25 and 15 off. He
afterward sold it to Mrs. Monroe,
receiving $50 cash and a monthly
payment of $6. After making seven
payments Mrs. Monroe returned the
instrument. Mr. Christie spent $5
for repairs and then sold the piano
for $550. What was his total profit?
Ans., $190.75.
20. Mr. Sherman bought, through
an agent, a carload, 20 tons, of
wheat at $1.75 per cwt., and paid
$15 freight. He sold the same at
$1.95 per cwt. He paid 4% com-
mission for buying, and 2%% for
selling. What was his gain? An?.,
$17.50.
21. A commission merchant
bought for Mr. Madsen 20 doz.
chairs listed $45 per doz., at dis-
counts of 20 and 10, and sold the
same at 15% discount, com. for buy-
ing 2%, com. for selling 4%, other
expenses $8.75. What was Mr.
Madsen's profit? Ans., $64.69.
22. Wiley B. Allen bought a
piano listed at $600 at 30 ana 10
off, and paid an agent 5% for mak-
ing the purchase. He sold the same
piano at 20% discount and paid his
84
ARITHMETIC
clerk 4% for making the sale. How
much did he make? Ans., $63.90.
23. Mrs. Jamison bought a house
and lot for $3,000 and spent $500
for alterations and repairs. She in-
sured the house for $2,800 on the
three years' plan at a basis rate of
45c, and pays taxes at $2.45 on an
assessed valuation of $2,250. The
house rents at $40 per month, and
the water rate is $2 a month. What
per cent does the investment pay?
Ans., 11.21%.
24. Mr. Strong keeps his house
insured on the three years' plan for
$3,560, the annual rate being 65c,
policy fee $1. The house burns
during the thirteenth year. What
does the agent make, and how much
does the company receive? Ans.,
A. $39.71; Co. $196.69.
25. Mrs. Phillips bought a house
and lot for $2,400, keeps it insured
on the three years' plan for $1,600,
at the annual rate of 45c, no policy
fee. She pays taxes at $2.45 on
$1,500, water at $1.60 per month,
and rents the house for $25 a month.
The house is vacant two months
each year. What per cent does she
realize on her money? (No water
tax when the house is vacant.)
Ans., 8% 60 %.
26. Mr. Mason bought a house
and lot for $3,800 and made altera-
tions costing $700. He placed it on
sale for $6,000, afterward reduced
the price 10% and paid the agent
5%. What per cent does he make
on his investment? Ans., 14%.
27. The Home Union bought
flour listed at $4.75 a bbl. at J0%
discount, paid freight at 25c per
bbl., and sold the consignment at
5% above list price. How much
was made on 1,200 bbls. ? Ans.,
$555.
28. Miss Thrifty bought a lot for
$1,200, built a house for $3,200, in-
sured it for three years on % of
value at 40c annual rate. She rent-
ed it at $35 a month, reserved $25
a year for repairs. She paid taxes
at $2.55 regular and 35c special, on
a valuation of $2,500, and pays wa-
ter rate of $1.50 a month. Find per
cent on investment. Ans., 6.775%.
29. Mr. Ross bought a house for
$3,000 and spent $200 for repairs.
He offered it for sale at $4,000, re-
duced his price 10%, and paid an
agent 5% for selling it. What was
his gain? Ans., $220.
30. Mr. Lion sells furniture on
credit at an advancement of 25% on
the cost. He collects through an
agent 90% of the sales. The ageAt
keeps 4% commission, and pays in
$43,200. What is Mr. Lion's profit,
and what per cent does he make on
his goods? Ans., $3,200; 8%.
31. A contractor builds a nouse
for $3,300, realizing a profit of 20"%
on the cost. The cost of the labor
was to the cost of the material as 2
is to 3. Find cost of labor and ma-
terial. Ans., L. $1,100; M. $1,650.
32. If wages should advance
20%, and material decline 20% in
value, and the same house be built
at the same price, wha^t per cent
would the contractor make on the
cost? Ans., 25%.
33. Mr. Harper's property is as-
sessed as follows: real estate, $6,500,
personal property, $1,500. The reg-
ular rate is $2.45, the special rate
25c. Find each installment of his
taxes. Ans., $128.25, $87.75.
34. How much will Mr. Harper's
taxes be if they are all paid January
10th? Ans., $235.24.
35. Mrs. Hooker is assessed
$4,500 on real estate and $500 on
personal property. The rates are
$2.45 regular and 25c special. She
pays her taxes May 1st. How much
does she pay? Ans., $152.89.
36. Mr. Bennett's house was as-
sessed at $2,400, and his personal
property for $200. The regular rate
was $2.10, and the special rate 15c.
He paid his first installment Febru-
ary 1st, and his second installment
INTEREST
85
May 2nd. What did his taxes cost
him? Ans., $64.58.
37. Mr. Fpley is assessed $12,400
on real estate and $2,600 on per-
sonal property. The regular rate is
$1.55, and the special rate 15c. Mr.
F. pays the first installment April
1st, and the second installment May
1st. How much do his taxes cost
him? Ans., $282.71.
38. Mrs. Anderson has real es-
tate assessed at $6,400 and personal
property assessed at $3,640. The
regular state and county rate is
$1.65, and there is a special rate o"f
15c. Find each installment of her
taxes. Ans., $123.12; $57.60.
39. What will her taxes be if paid
March 1st? Ans., $199.19.
40. What will her taxes cost if
all are paid May 1st? Ans., $208.22.
41. Mr. Reynolds sold a house at
a loss of 25 per cent. He invested
the money received in another house
which he afterward sold for $4,104,
gaining 20 per cent on its cost. What
was his net loss. Ans., $456.
42. Mr. Conkling sold 40 per cent
of a carload of potatoes at a profit
of 50 per cent, 25 per cent at a
profit of 20 per cent and the re-
mainder at a loss of 33^ per cent.
He received altogether $408. \Vhat
v;as his gain? Ans., $48.
43. Mr. Anderson bought a piano
/'-ted at $600, with discounts of 40
and 20 off. He sold it at a discount
of 25 per cent and paid an agent 10
per cent commission for selling. What
was Mr. Anderson's gain, and what
was the agent's commission?
Ans., $117.
44. Mr. Buell bought a carriage
listed at $500, receiving discounts of
25 and 10 off, paying an agent 5
per cent for making the purchase,
and $12.50 freight. He sold the car-
riage at 15 per cent discount. What
was his gain? Ans., $59.125.
45. Mr. Cowper received $114 as
the proceeds of the sale of a mower.
He had allowed a discount of 4 per
cent and had paid an agent 5 per
cent commission for making the sale.
The mower had been purchased at
30 per cent discount. What was
Mr. Cowper's gain? Ans., $26.50.
INTEREST.
Interest is usually charged at a
certain rate per cent per annum.
The time is found by counting
from one date to another, ordinarily
by compound subtraction, sometimes
however, by finding the actual number
of days. When compound subtraction
is used, 30 days are called a month
and 12 months, or 360 days, a year.
When the time is found by counting
the actual number of days 360 days
are called a year in ordinary com-
mercial transactions, and for exact
interest 365 days make a year. Ex-
act interest is reckoned by the large
city banks only, and by the United
States government.
When interest is to be calculated
for years or years and months, it is
only necessary to find the interest
for one year and then multiply this
by the number of years and frac-
tion of a year.
Find the interest on $265.40 for
3 years 9 months at 5 per cent.
Solution.
3 yr. 9 mo. equal 3^4 years.
$264.40
.05
$13.2200 Int. for 1 yr.
9915
3966
$49.58 Int. 3^4 yr.
When interest is to be found for
days or months and days any one
of several different methods may be
used.
Cancellation Method.
Reduce the time to a fraction of
86
ARITHMETIC
a year, indicate the work and use
cancellation.
Find the interest on $375.60 lor
7 months 18 days at 5 per cent.
Solution.
7 mo. 18 da. equal 1 % y r -
.1252
X 5 X 19
$.1252X5X19=$11.894 Ans.
To apply the method skillfully re-
quires that attention be given to
three things:
1st Reducing the time to a frac-
tion of a year.
2nd Indicating the work.
3rd The canceling.
First. It is best as a rule to
change the days to a fraction of a
month, unite the result with the
months, then change to a fraction of
a year. When days only are given,
write 360ths of a year and reduce
to its lowest terms. Thus,
6 mo. 18 da. = 6% mo. = 1 ^ y r -
4 mo. 8 da. = 4% 5 mo. = J % 5 yr.
7 mo. 20 da. =! 2 /z mo. = 2 % 6 yr.
4 mo. 15 da. =4% mo.=^ yr.
2 yr. 4 mo. 15 da. = 2^g yr.
Reduce to fractions of a year 3
mo. 18 da., 5 mo. 12 da., 2 yr. 4 mo.
9 da., 1 yr. 7 mo. 10 da.
It should be noted that the factors
of 30 are 2-3-5; those of 12, 2-2-3.
If the number of days does not con-
tain a factor 2, 3, or 5, it is best
to reduce the months and days to
days and place the result over 360.
When exact interest is required
find the actual number of days and
place over 365.
Second Write the rate as a com-
mon fraction and express the time
as a proper or improper fraction as
the case may require. See examples
solved above.
Third It is best, as a rule, to can-
cel the ciphers in the denominators
first and place a mark in the dollars
as many places to the left of the dec-
imal point as there are ciphers in the
denominators which have been can-
celed. Do not cancel a cipher to
the right of the decimal point, for
this makes no change in the value of
the number. When other factors
have been canceled into the dollars,
the mark should be replaced by the
decimal point.
the denominator has been
redr ,a to a number not greater
than 12 so that short division may
be used, little is gained by further
cancellation. It is as easy to divide
by 9 as by 3, by 8 as by 4.
Six Per Cent Method.
First get the interest on $1 for the
given time at 6 per cent.
The interest on $1 for 1 year is
$.06.
The interest on $1 for 2 montus
is .01.
The interest on $1 for 1 month is
.005.
The interest on $1 for 6 days is
.001.
The interest on $1 for 1 day is
.000^.
Hence the rule :
To get the interest on $1 for any
time at 6 per cent. Multiply .06 by
the number of years. Divide the num-
ber of months by 2, call the quotient
cents and the remainder if any 5
mills. Divide the number of days by
6, call the quotient mills and the re-
mainder 6ths of a mill. The sum of
the results is the required interest.
Find the interest on $1 for 3 yr.
7 mo. 19 da. at 6 per cent.
$1 @ 6 per ct. for 3 yr == .18
$1 @ 6 per ct. for 7 mo. = .035
$1 @ 6 per ct. for 19 da. = .003/6
Total = .218/6
With a little practice the result
may be found by inspection. Fol-
low the order given above, and add
results as you proceed. Thus: .18.
.215, .218^.
COMPOUND INTEREST
87
For 4 yr. 9 mo. 24 da. The re-
sults are thought out as follows :
.24, .285, .289.
Find the ^interest on $1 at 6 per
cent for
2 yr. 8 mo. 18 da.
5 yr. 6 mo. 12 da.
7 yr. 7 mo. 15 da.
1 yr. 9 mo. 11 da. etc.
Second. To find the interest on
any principal for any time at 6 per
cent. Multiply the principal by the
interest on $1 at 6 per cent for the
given time.
Find the interest on $247.40 for 3
yr. 10 mo. 18 da.
Interest on $1 for the given time
is .233.
$247.40 Prin.
.233 Int. on $1.
74220
74220
49480
$57.64420 Ans.
Third. To find the interest on any
principal at any rate. Find the in-
terest at 6 per cent and increase or
decrease the result by such a fraction
of itself as the per cent is greater or
less than 6.
Use of Interest Tables.
Books of tables are prepared giv-
ing the time from any date to any
other in the year, and data from
which the interest on any sum at
any ordinary rate for any desired
number of years, months and days
may be obtained by addition. These
books are used largely by bankers
and others who have much interest
calculating to do.
Solve the first four problems giv-
en below by cancellation, the next
four by the six per cent method, the
next by either method, and the last
two by using the actual number of
days and 365 days to the year.
Find the interest:
1. On $485.40 at 7 per cent from
Jan. 10 to July 25, 1914.
2. On $296.52 at 4y 2 per cent
from Dec. 16, 1913, to Aug. 4,
1914.
3. On $956 at 8% per cent from
Sept. 10, 1914, to Jan. 26, 1915.
4. On $76.85 at 9 per cent from
Feb. 13, 1915, to May 17, 1916.
5. On $283.56 at 6 per cent from
Oct. 8, 1914, to April 26, 1916.
6. On $4967.25 at 6 per cent from
May 7, 1913, to Jan. 16, 1916.
7. On $274.45 at 5 per cent from
Nov. 6, 1913, to June 1, 1914.
8. On $865.27 at iy 2 per cent
from Oct. 18, 1914, to Feb. 28, 1916.
9. On $1360.32 at 5% per cent
from May 21, to Dec. 14, 1915.
10. On $675.80 at 8 per cent
from April 17, 1914, to . July 24,
1915.
11. On $674.82 at 6 per cent for
3 yr. 7 mo. 11 da.
12. On $206.15 at 4 per cent for
7 yr. 3 mo. 18 da.
13. On $267.83 at 6 per cent
from June 27 to Sept. 23, 1914.
14. On $7658.25 at 5 per cent
from Feb. 18 to May 27, 1916.
COMPOUND INTEREST.
When interest is made payable at
stated intervals, if it is not paid
when due, it is usually added to
the principal and bears interest. In
such cases interest is said to be
compounded. Postal and other sav-
ings banks pay compound interest.
When interest is to be compound-
ed the result for long terms is found
by the use of compound interest ti-
bles.
When the use of a table is not
convenient, the interest is added to
the principal at the end of each term,
and this becomes the principal for
the succeeding term or part of a
term as the case may be.
88
ARITHMETIC
A good concise form saves time
and is a safeguard against mistakes.
Find the compound interest on
$375 for 1 yr. 9 mo. 10 da. at 4 per
cent compounded semiannually.
Solution.
4 per cent is 2 per cent for a half
year or term.
1 yr. 9 mo. 10 da. = 3 terms -f 3
mo. 10 da.
3 mo. 10 da. = % of a term
1st Prin. $375. X .02
1st Int. 7.50
2nd Prin
2nd Int.
3rd Prin.
3rd Int.
382.50 X .02
7.65
390.15 X .02
7.803
4th Prin.
4th Int.
Amt.
Prin.
397. 953 X .02 X %
4.422
$402.375
$375.
Int. $ 27.375
Side work:
39'7.953 X 2X^=39. 7953=4. 422
9 9
1. Find the amount of $2100 for
2 yr. 6 mo. at 6 per cent compound-
ed semiannually. Ans. $2434.48.
2. A note for $1200 dated Nov.
7, 1912, with interest at 8 per cent
compounded semi-annually was paid
Jan. 1st, 1915. How much was due,
no payment having been made. Ans.,
$1420.69.
3. Henry Moss deposits $100 in a
savings bank Jan. 1 and July 1 of
each year beginning Jan. 1, 1914. The
bank allows 4 per cent interest com-
pounded semi-annually. If the prac-
tise is continued and no money is
withdrawn how much will be due
him Dec. 31. 1916? Ans., $643.43.
4. Mr. Allen has a school bond
for $1000 bearing 6 per cent interest
payable semi-annually, the bond to
be paid in five years. If Mr. Allen
deposits his interest payments in a
bank which pays interest at 4 per
cent payable semi-annually, how
much will he have to his credit at
the end of the five years inclusive
of the final payment? Ans., $1328.47.
5. Miss Stoner opened an ac-
count with a savings bank Jan. 1,
1914, and deposits $5 each Thursday.
The bank pays 4 per cent compound
interest allowing interest on the
amount on deposit on the first day
of any month and adds the interest
July 1st and Jan. 1st. What will
be due on her account Jan. 1, 1915?
Ans., $269.89.
6. Find the amount of $376 for
1 yr. 8 mo. 10 da. at 6 per cent
compounded quarterly. Ans., $415.93.
Partial Payments.
It is not unusual for partial pay-
ments to be made on notes before
the time for final settlement. The
study of Partial Payments is there-
fore of value in itself, besides giv-
ing practice in computing interest,
in the use of good forms and in
keeping track of the work in a series
of operations.
Before commencing the work the
data should all be taken down as
shown below, each date and its cor-
responding payment being written
above the date and payment immedi-
ately preceding it.
Next, all the times should be
found in order by compound sub-
traction and the corresponding pay-
ments brought down. Then the cal-
culations should proceed step by step,
care being taken that the interest
calculations are clearly indicated,
that in the addition and subtraction
work the decimal points are kept in
the same vertical line, and that each
payment is checked as soon as it is
used.
The United States rule is com-
monly followed when the note runs
more than a year. When the time
is a year or less the Mercantile rule
is usually followed, tho there are no
fixed customs for either rule.
PARTIAL PAYMENTS
89
United States Rule. Find the
amount of the principal to a time
when a payment or the sum of two
or more payments equals or exceeds
the interest due, and from the amount
subtract such payment or payments.
With the remainder as a new prin-
cipal proceed as before.
Model I.
(Each payment exceeds the interest
due.)
A note for $5000 was given Aug.
2, 1908, bearing interest at 6 per
cent. The following payments were
endorsed: Paid Sept. 9, 1908, $500;
May 12, 1909, $350. What amount
would settle the note July 2, 1909?
Yr. Mo. Da.
1909 7 2
1909 5 - 12 $350
1908 9 9 $500
1908 8 2 ....
.006% 1 7 $500 V
.0405 8 3 $350 V
.00% - 1 20 . . . . V
5000 X .006^=$ 30.833
4530. 83 X .0403 =$183.498
4364. 33X .00^ =$ 36.369
Rate 6%
Prin.
Int.
Amt.
1st Pay.
Bal.
Int.
Amt.
2nd Pay.
Bal.
Int.
Amt.
500
30
83
5030
500
83
4530
183
83
50
4714
350
33
4364
36
33
37
4400
70
Yr. Mo. Da.
1909 510 -
19081212 $380
1907 61 $ 46
1906 715 $130
1905
Model II.
(The interest exceeds a payment.)
Principal $850. Date May 10,
1905. Rate 7 per cent. Endorse-
ments: July 15, 1906, $130; June
1, 1907, $46; Dec. 12, 1908, $380.
What was due May 10, 1909?
Rate 7%
1_ 2 5 $130V
-1016 $ 46V
1 611 $380 V
_ 428 -
8'50X7X85=$70.24
J00 72
'790 . 24X7X79=$48 . 556
790 . 24 X 7X551=$84 .657
260
'497 . 46 X7X37^$14 . 315
90
Prin.
Int.
Amt.
1st Pay.
Bal.
Int.
Int.
Amt.
2nd & 3rd Pay.
Bal.
Int.
Amt.
850
70
24
920
130
24
790
48
84
24
56
66
923
426
46
497
14
46
32
511
78
90
ARITHMETIC
1. A note for $2150, dated Mar.
10, 1913, and bearing interest at 8
per cent was indorsed as follows :
Sept 25, 1913, $275.
Mar. 10, 1914, $365.
How much was due Mar. 10,
1915? Ans., $1770.39.
2. A note for $965, dated Jan.
16, 1912, and bearing interest at 7
per cent has the following indorse-
ments :
May 7, 1913, $150.
Jan. 16, 1914, $30.
June 28, 1914, $275.
How much was due Jan. 16, 1915?
Ans., $620.64.
3. Mr. Rawlins gave a note for
$1400 Oct. 12, 1912, with interest
at 6 per cent payable semi-annually .
He paid the interest and $250 on
the principal at each interest pay-
ment. How much was each pay-
ment and how much remained due
Oct. 12, 1914? Ans., $271, $267.25,
$263.50, and $659.75.
Merchant's Rule. Find the amount
of the principal from its date to the
time of settlement.
Find the interest on each payment
from the time it was made till the
time of settlement.
From the amount of the principal
subtract the amount of the payments
and their interest.
Yr.
1908
1907
1907
1907
Mo.
1
10
7
5
Model.
Each date is subtracted from the
last.
A note for $500 dated May 15,
1907, has the following endorse-
ments: July 10, 1907, $145; Oct. 16,
1907, $175. How much was due
Jan. 1, 1908, interest at 6 per cent?
Da.
1
16 $175
10 $145
15
.0372/3
.0285
.0125
$500 X
$145 X
$175 X
7 16 .... V
521 $145 V
215 $175 V
037%= $18.833
0285 = 4.132
0125 == 2.187
Rate 6%
Prin.
500
Int.
18
83
$518
83
1st Pay.
145
..
Int.
4
13
2nd Pay.
175
. .
Int.
2
19
326
32
Bal.
|| $192
51
In connection with this subject
discuss notes, indorsements, life of
note, etc.
1. A note for $975, dated April
16, 1913, and bearing interest at
6% per cent was indorsed as fol-
lows :
June 20, 1913, $375.
Sept. 16, 1913, $450.
How much was due Mar.
1914? Ans., $175.46.
16,
2. On a note for $1200, dated
July 1, 3913, bearing interest at 7
per cent payments of $300 wett
made at the end of each quarter.
How much was due July 1, 1914?
Ans., $352.50.
BANK DISCOUNT
91
Bank Discount.
Commercial banks make loans tor
not to exceed six months, as a rule,
with interest payable quarterly or
semi-annually . The borrower re-
ceives the face of the note and pays
the face and accrued interest. Some
banks collect the interest in advance,
but this is not customary in Califor-
nia.
Commercial paper issued by large
manufacturing- firms or packing com-
panies and county or city warrants
are discounted by deducting the in-
terest on the face from the time the
paper is purchased by the bank to
the time it is due. Notes are sel-
dom bought in this way.
If an interest-bearing note is dis-
counted the discount is reckoned on
the amount that will be due on the
note at the time it falls due.
Find the discount by counting the
actual number of days and using
360 days for a year. Days of grace
are not allowed in California.
This interest on notes or other pa-
per discounted is called bank dis-
count, and the amount paid the hold-
er is the proceeds.
Find the bank discount and pro-
ceeds of a warrant for $220 due in
75 days, and discounted at one per
cent a month.
Solution.
Face
Discount
$220
5.50
Proceeds $214.50
Side work.
75 da. equal % mo.
$2.20X% equal $5.50
1. A time draft for $167.50 due
in 4 months is discounted at 7 per
cent. Find the discount and pro-
ceeds .
2. Mr. Anderson holds a 90 da.
time draft for $1062.80, dated Aug.
15. He sells it Oct. 5 to the First
Nations Bank which discounts it at
6 per cent. Find the proceeds.
3. Mr. Ryan holds a note for
$975.60 due in 5 months and bear-
ing 5 per cent interest. He sells it
to the Commercial Bank at 8 per
cent bank discount. Find the pro-
ceeds .
4. A note for $4760 dated July
1st, 1914, and bearing interest at 6
per cent and due 6 months after
date was discounted Sept. 10 at 7
per cent. Find the proceeds.
It is sometimes required to find
the face of a note which will yield a
given amount when discounted at a
bank, tho such a problem would
seldom if ever arise in practise. To
solve such a problem find the pro-
ceeds of one dollar and divide the
given proceeds by it.
Find the face of a 90 day note
which will give proceeds of $1200
when discounted at a bank at 8 per
cent.
Solution.
Int. on $1 for 90 da. at 8 per
cent equals .02.
$1.00 $.02 equal $.98.
12 24.89
,98) $1200.00'00
98
220
196
240
196
440
392
880
784
96
Ans. $1224.49.
1. Mr. Watson has purchased an
automobile for $1360. If the bank
charges 7 per cent discount for how
must a 60 day note be drawn in or-
der to secure the purchase price?
2. Mr. Peart has bargained for
an orchard for $22500. He has
$18000 cash and is to pay the bal-
ance in four months. For how much
must his note be drawn that the
92
ARITHMETIC
balance may be realized if the note
is discounted at a bank at 6^ per
cent?
Present Worth.
If a sum of money is to be paid at
a future date its present value would
be the principal which would amount
to that sum at the given time.
1. What is the present value of
$800 due in 9 months without in-
terest, money being worth 6 per
cent?
One dollar amounts to $1.045 in
9 months. $800 divided by $1.045
will give the desired principal which
is $765.55.
2. A bond of $1000 due in three
years bears 6 per cent interest pay-
able annually. If money is worth 5
per cent what is the present value
of the bond?
There will be three payments, one
of $60 in 1 year, another of $60 in
two years, and a third of $1060 in
three years. The present value of
the bond is the sum of the present
values of these three payments. Us-
ing compound interest which is
proper when payments are made at
stated intervals the answer is
$1027.23.
3. Mr. Crittenden has his farm
leased for five years at a cash ren-
tal of $5000 a year payable at the
end of the year. What is the pres-
ent worth of the lease reckoning
money worth 6 per cent simple in-
terest? Ans., $2196.97.
In the following problems use
compound interest making use of a
table.
4. If money is worth 4%, what
should be paid for a bond for $1,000
payable in 5 years, and bearing 5%
interest payable annually? Ans.,
$1,044.51.
5. Mr. Brown bought a house
for $4,000. He is to pay for it in
five equal annual payments, each
payment to be made at the end of
the year. Interest at 6% is allowed
on unpaid balances. What is the an-
nual payment? Ans., $949.58.
6. Mr. Clements proposes to
place $100 in the bank to the credit
of his son each birthday from the
16th to the 21st, inclusive. The bank
allows 4% interest compounded semi-
annually. How much will the son
have to his credit when he is twen-
ty-one? Ans., $663.96.
7. Mr. Moore, who is 60 years
old, wishes to deposit sufficient
money in a savings bank to meet
the annual payment of $60 on his
insurance policy for ten years, the
payments to be made at the end of
each year. The bank allows 4%
interest compounded semi-annually.
How much must Mr. Moore de-
posit? Ans., $485.68.
8. Mr. Simpson offers his farm
for $5,000 cash, or $6,060 payable in
three equal annual payments with-
out interest, the payments to be
made at the end of the year. It
money is worth 6%, which proposi-
tion is the best, and how much?
Ans., $5,000 is $346.02 better for the
purchaser.
MENSURATION.
Areas and volumes of rectangular
figures offer no serious difficulty
and may be presented in an ele-
mentary way as early as the third
year, thus furnishing excellent con-
crete material for the application of
multiplication and division. Care
should be taken that the pupil does
not form the habit of saying and
thinking that feet multiplied by feet
give square feet, inches multiplied by
inches give square inches, square
feet multiplied by feet give cubic
feet, square inches multiplied by
inches give cubic inches, and so on.
These notions arise from the fact
that a rectangle 4 inches by 5 inches
for example contains 4 times 5 or
20 square inches and a rectangular
solid 3 inches by 4 inches by 5
inches for example contains 3 times
4 times 5 cubic inches.
MENSURATION
93
It is best at first to associate men-
suration work with the setting out
of trees or vines in rows to form an
orchard or vineyard, and the pack-
ing of eggs and fruit in boxes, of
canned goods and other packages in
cases, and similar work. A set of
pasteboard forms used for keeping
the eggs in a box separate will be
very suggestive. It will be seen that
each row will hold 6 eggs and that
there are 6 rows, hence one form
will hold 6 times 6 eggs, or 36 eggs.
Each of these forms makes a layer
in one end of an egg box and there
are five layers in the box placed one
above another. An egg box there-
fore contains 2 times 5 times 36 or
360 eggs. How many dozens? In
like manner a case of canned corn
contains 2 layers of cans placed in
rows of 3 by 4.
Have pupils cut two differnt col-
ors of card board into square inches.
These may be built into rectangles
of different shape. The pupils will
soon be able to determine that a rec-
tangle 5 inches by 6 inches for ex-
ample will contain 5 times 6 or 30
square inches. They can also de-
termine beforehand that it requires
21 square inches to make a rect-
angle 3 inches by 7 inches. How
many square inches are required to
make a square foot? How many
square feet to make a square yard?
Why? If square inches of card-
board are cut diagonally into tri-
angles, many pleasing patterns may
be made. Try such exercises with
children of the third and fourth
years and note the results.
The school should be supplied with
cubic inch blocks of wood. These
may be used in building up rect-
angular solids, and thru this work
the pupil will learn how to determine
the number of cubic inches in a solid
of given dimensions. Do not teach
rules for mensuration before the
work is regularly taken up in the
eighth year.
1. Draw a rectangle whose sides
are respectively 4 in. and 5 in. Draw
lines dividing it as shown in Fig. 39.
ft.
yd.
sq. rd.
CHART 1.
Note that the figure is divided
into squares one inch on a side, i. e.,
square inches, that there are five
squares in each horizontal row ; that
there are four such rows; that there-
fore the area is 4 X 5 sq. in., or 20
square inches.
In like manner show by diagram
that
144 sq. in. = 1 sq.
9 sq. ft. = 1 sq.
sq. yd. = 1
To find the area of a given sui-
face is to find the number of squares
of a given kind that it contains.
From the problems given above,
it will be seen that to find the area
of a rectangle Multiply the number
of units in the length by the num-
ber of units in the width.
9. What is the area in sq. m. of
a square whose side is 27 m.
10. Find the area in sq. cm. of
the surface represented in fig. 40.
11. Find the area in sq. cm. of
the surface represented in fig. 41.
ARITHMETIC
CARPETING.
Carpet is usually 3 ft., or 27 in.
wide, and a yard of carpet means
one yard in length without regard
to the width.
Strips. In finding how many
yards of carpet are required it is
necessary to decide which way the
strips are to be laid and then to
determine how many strips are re-
quired. A fractional part of a strip
must be reckoned as a whole strip.
Matching. Most carpet has a well
defined pattern which should be
matched along the edges of the
strips. To do this it is necessary
that each strip shall begin at the
same point of the pattern. Hence,
in determining the length of a strip
full pattern lengths must be reck-
oned on all strips after the first.
Border. Sometimes a carpet is
surrounded with a border. This bor-
der is matched at the corners by
beveling and its length must equal
the distance around the room.
1. A room 13' x 16' is to be cov-
ered with carpet 27" wide, the strips
to run lengthwise. How many
yards are required if there is no
waste in matching?
2. How many yards of carpet
one yard wide are required to cover
a room 20' x 22', the strips running
lengthwise, if 8" arc lo^t in match-
ing all strips except the first?
3. A room 14'8" x 16'6" is to
be covered with carpet 27" wide at
$1.40 a yard. The strips are to run
lengthwise and there is a 12 inch
pattern. How much will the car-
pet cost?
4. A room 16' x 18' is to be car-
peted with carpet 27" wide at $1.50
a yard surrounded with a border 16"
wide at $1.35 a yard. The carpet
has a 15 inch pattern and the strips
are to run lengthwise. Find the
cost of the carpet and border.
Papering and Plastering.
6 cm
fif 42
CHART II.
Take a box 2^ in. long, 2 in.
wide and \ l / 2 in. deep without top.
Cut along the edges and spread out
as shown in figure 42. This will
represent the walls and ceiling of a
room.
Paper is sold by the double roll
sixteen yards long, or the single
roll of eight yards, the width being
18 inches as a rule. Border is sold
by the running yard.
There is no fixed rule for allow-
ance for opening. Some contract-
ors deduct one half the openings,
others allow 2 square yards for each
single opening. In practise paper-
hangers take sufficient paper from
the stores with the privilege of re-
turning unused rolls.
Plastering is done by the square
yard and the allowance for openings
is the same as for papering.
1. Find the cost at $.25 a double
roll for paper and border at 3c a
yard for a room 18' x 22',
9'6" high, there being 2 windows
and 2 doors.
LUMBER MEASURE
95
2. A house 24' x 30', with walls
9' is divided into four rooms. There
are ten windows, two outside, and
five inside doors. Find the cost of
plastering at 27 cents a square yard.
3. Figure 43 represents the floor
plan of a room 20' x 26', the L
ends each being 12', height of ceil-
ing ?)'. There are six windows 3'6"
x 5'2", and two doors 3' x
6'8". Find the cost of plastering
the room at 30 cents a square yard
allowing for half the openings.
4. Find the cost at $1.25 a yard
of carpeting the room described in
problem 3 with carpet a yard wide
containing a 16 inch pattern, the
strips running lengthwise.
Lumber Measure.
Lumber is sold by the thousand
board feet except that moldings and
the like are sold by the running foot.
A board foot is a square foot of
lumber one inch thick. A thickness
less than an , inch is counted as an
inch.
Thicknesses of more than an inch
are reckoned in inches and quarters
of an inch. When lumber is sur-
faced on one side, or sized, its thick-
ness is reduced one eighth of an
inch, but the full thickness is used
in calculating the amount of lumber.
In tongue and grooved lumber,
such as flooring, a 3 inch board cov-
ers 2 l /2 inches of floor space, a 4
inch board covers 3y 2 inches. In
calculating the amount of 3 inch
flooring required for a building, find
the amount of floor space and add
Ys of it. For a 4 inch flooring add
1 /4-
Rustic and other siding overlaps
about an inch. Hence, for 8 inch
rustic find the number of square feet
in the walls to be covered and add
VT
In calculating the amount of lum-
ber change the length and width to
feet and the thickness to inches.
Find the cost of 36 pieces of red-
wood 2" x 10" by 32' long @ $22
M.
Solution.
36X2X8_=192 board feet =
3
.192 M.
.192
22
384
384
4.224
Ans. $4.22.
1. Find the cost of the following
bill of lumber at $21 M. Make out
bill.
28 pieces 2" x 12", 34' long.
48 pieces 1"
20 pieces l
16 pieces
2.
x 8", 16' long.
x 10", 14' long.
x 6", 18' long.
Find the cost at $32 M. of 8
inch rustic to cover a building
36' x 54' outside measurement, the
walls being 14' high.
3. Find the cost at $38 M. of 3
inch flooring for a one story L
shaped building 30' x 36' with L
ends each 18' wide.
4. Find the cost at lie a foot for
chalk molding and 6c a foot for up-
per molding for a room 33' x 35'
with two doors each 4' wide and six
windows each 3'6" wide.
Shingling.
Shingles are put up in bundles of
250 shingles each and sold by the
thousand, only whole bunches being
sold.
While practically shingles are of
varying widths a shingle, commer-
cially considered, is four inches wide.
Shingles are usualy laid with 4 inch-
es or 4^4 inches exposed. When
96
ARITHMETIC
laid 4 inches to the weather one
shingle covers 16 square inches, or
9 shingles cover a square foot. When
y 2 inches are exposed 8 shingles
cover one square foot.
Find the cost at $2.40 M. of shin-
gles laid 4^2 in. to the weather to
cover a roof each side of which is
24' x 60'.
Solution.
2X24X60X8 equal 23040.
23040 shingles equal 23.04 M.
23.25 M. required.
23.25 X $2.40 equal $55.80 Ans.
1. Find the cost at $2.50 M. of
shingles for a roof each side of
which is 23' x 41' the shingles being
laid 4" to the weather.
Land Measure.
/
For a full description of land
measure in the United States see
the California Advanced Arithmetic,
pages 297-303.
A township is six miles square
and contains 36 sections of 640 acres
each if full size.
The sections of a township are
numbered as shown in the diagram.
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
8
9
10
II
12
18
17
16
15
14
13
19
20
21
22
23
24
30
29
28
27
26
25
31
32
33
34
35
36
When land is surveyed by the
government, posts or stones are
placed along section and township
lines every half mile, thus establish-
ing section and quarter section cor-
ners. An interior quarter section
corner must be located at the inter-
section of lines joining opposite
quarter section corners. A section
may be further subdivided and the
portions described as shown below.
A
B
F
C
E
D
A. W. y 2 of sec.
B. N.E. V 4 of sec.
C. E. y 2 of S.E. y 4 of sec.
S.W. y 4 of S.E. y 4 of sec.
s. y 2 of N.W. y 4 of S.E.
D.
E.
y 4 of sec.
In determining the amount of land
in a portion of a section deal with
the squares as units bearing in mind
that a section has 640 acres, a quar-
ter section 160 acres and a quarter
of a quarter 40 acres, etc. F in the
diagram, for example, has y 2 of 40
A. or 20 A.
In following examples locate the
land in the section and the sections
in the township.
1. Find the value of \V.y 2 of
N.E. y 4 S.W.y 4 of sec. 26 at $65
an acre.
2. Find at $2.25 a rod the cost of
fencing N.E. l / 4 of N.W. % of
S.W. y 4 of sec. 17.
3. Mr. Wallace purchased the
S.E. y 4 of sec. 21, the W. y> ot
S.W. y 4 of sec. 22, and the N.W.
V 4 of N.W. y 4 of sec. 27, all in T.
4 S., R. 2 W. at $85 an acre. Find
the cost of the land and the number
of rods of fence required to enclose
it
SQUARE ROOT
97
Rectangles, Squares.
In the figures in this chapter, use
the same lengths for a, b, and c res-
pectively thruout.
1. By the square on a line is
meant the square of which that line
is one side.
The square on the line, a, is the
square which has a for one side,
(Fig. 70). It is written a 2 , and is
read, The square on the line a.
2. The rectangle of two lines
means the rectangle whose length is
one of the lines and whose width
is the other.
The rectangle of the lines, a and
b, is the rectangle whose length is
a and whose width is b, (Fig. 71).
It is written rect. ab. and is read
must be less
than 1.
It will take longer to construct
27 miles than 18 miles, hence the
ratio, 2 % 8 , must be greater than 1.
1. If the peach crop from 25
acres brings $3400 when the dried
fruit is sold at 7c a pound, what is
the value of a similar crop on 45
acres sold at 6c a pound?
2. If 4200 tons of iron ore pro-
duce $3430 when iron is $36.80 a
ton, what is the value of 3500 tons
of like ore when iron is $42.50 a
ton?
3. If a reservoir 600 feet long,
350 feet wide and 9 feet deep holds
450000 barrels, how much will a
reservoir 800 feet long," 375 feet
wide and 7 feet deep hold?
Similar Figures.
Similar surfaces and solids are
those which have the same shape.
Their corresponding angles must be
equal and their corresponding lines
are proportional.
It is true of similar figures that
(1) their corresponding lines are
proportional, (2) the areas of sim-
ilar are to each other as the squares
of their corresponding lines, (3) the
volumes of similar figures are to
each other as the cubes of their
corresponding lines.
The dimensions of a block of mar-
ble are 8 in., 6 in., and 4 in., the cost
of polishing it $.65, and its weight is
18.26 Ib. The length of a similar
block is 42 in. Find the width,
thickness, and weight of the second
block and the cost of polishing its
surface.
1. w. th. cost wt.
8" 6" 4" $.65 18.26
42 ? ? ? ?
w. equals 6" X 42,
th. equals 4" X 42,
8
cost equals $.65 X 42 2 ,
wt. equals 18.26 Ib. X 42 s .
~8~ 3
1. A cone is 6 inches in diameter
and 7 inches in altitude. What is
the height of a similar cone 11 inch-
es in diameter?
2. If it takes 24 thousand shingles
to cover a roof 40 by 65 feet, how-
many will it take to cover both sides
of a similar roof 30 feet wide?
3. If a man 6 feet tall weighs
180 Ib. what did Goliath who was
10.5 feet tall weigh if he was of
similar proportions ?
4. If a 6 inch cannon ball weighs
39.5 pounds what is the weight of a
14 inch ball of the same material?
Longitude and Time.
The earth revolves on its axis from
west to east, causing the succession
of day and night. It makes a com-
plete revolution in 24 hours ; hence,
at a given place it is 24 hours from
sunrise to sunrise, or from noon to
noon.
Show that the following statements
are true:
LONGITUDE AND TIME
115
The earth turns 360 in 24 hr.
15 '
JO
15' "
1' "
15" "
1 hr.
4 min.
1 min.
4 sec.
1 "
Stand with your face to the south
and point toward the place where the
sun is seen at noon. Will it be fore-
noon or afternoon with persons living
east of you? West of you? It is
noon now at some place. Is that
place east or west of here? Where
was it noon an hour ago? Where
will it be noon an hour hence?
The time of day is later east and
earlier west of a given place.
Examine the following statements
and tell why they are true:
A difference of 15 in Ion. makes
a difference of 1 hour in time.
A difference of 15' in Ion. makes
a difference of 1 min. in time.
A difference of 15" in Ion. makes
a difference of 1 sec. in time.
Difference in longitude may be
changed to difference in time by di-
viding by 15 and calling the quotient
hrs., min. or sec., according as the
dividend is degrees, minutes, or sec-
onds.
Difference in time may be changed
to difference in longitude by multi-
plying by 15 and calling the result
degrees, minutes, or seconds accord-
ing as the multiplicand is hours,
minutes, or seconds.
Thru the relation of longitude and
time a captain determines the longi-
tude of his ship at sea, and the lon-
gitude of a place on the land is
found.
1. Find the difference in time be-
tween (1) 3:30 a. m. and 7:15 a. m. ;
(2) 6:25 a. m. and 4:45 p. m. ; (3)
1:10 p. m. and 11:55 p. m. ; (4)
2:55 a. m. and 9:12 p. m. ; (5) 7:18
p. m. and 4-'27 a. m. next day; (fi)
8:20 a. m. and 10:40 p. m. next day:
(7) 11:27 a. m. and 6:45 a. m. next
day; (8) 6:15 a. m. and 4:35 p. m.
next day; (9) 3:30 p. m. and 8:15
a. m. preceding day; (10) 9:27
p. m. and 5:15 a. m. preceding
day; (11) 2:55 p. m. and 11:25
p. m. of preceding day.
2. What is the time 9 hr. 24 min.
later than the following times: (1)
2:30 a. m. ? (2) 7:45 a. m. ?
(3) 1:12 p. m. (4) 11:38 p. m.?
Find the time which is 15 hr. 40
min. earlier than the following
times: (1) 6:15 a. m. ; (2) 1:50 a.
m.; (3) 9:10 p. m. ; (4) 2:15 p.m.
Longitude is reckoned east or
west from an established meredian.
The Meridian of Greenwich is used
in the problems in this book, that
being the one commonly so used.
vv L ofl c
Lon.
If* 1 uT" (,0
-If' 3
4. Find the difference in longi-
tude between the following places:
(1) 15 W. and 75 W. ; (2)
15 E. and 75 W. ; (3)
30 E. and 45 E. : (4) 30 E. and
45 W.
5. Find the longitude of a person
who has traveled as follows:
(1) Started at 45 E. and traveled
60 eastward;
116
ARITHMETIC
(2) Started at 45 E. and traveled
70 westward;
(3) Started at 23 45' W. and
traveled 65 eastward;
(4) Started at 35 W. and trav-
eled 20 30' eastward;
(5) Started at 26 27' W. and
traveled 38 50' westward.
Places on the earth cannot have
more than 180 E. or W. longitude.
6. The longitude of San Francisco
is 122 W., nearly. Find the longi-
tude of a person who starts at San
Francisco (1) 30 D W. ; (2) 65 E.,
(3) 150 E. : (4) 75 E.
7. If one should start at Calcutta
(88 E.) and travel 125 eastward,
what would then be his longitude?
The time of day is determined by
the revolution of the earth on its
axis, the date and the day of the
week are fixed by man. In order to
avoid confusion of date the nations
have agreed upon an International
Date Line. This line runs along
180 E. or W. except where the
latter runs across land, or would
separate islands of a group. In such
cases the date line runs east or west
of 180. The new day first begins
at midnight on the International
Date Line.
The time of any place in E. lon-
gitude is always later than that of
any place in W. longitude.
When the difference in longitude
in two places is found to be greater
than 180, it is not best to subtract
that amount from 360 before find-
ing the difference in time.
To avoid confusion in time tables
and guard against accidents, the
railway managers of North America
have agreed on a system of time-
keeping, called Standard Time.
Meridians are chosen fifteen degrees
apart, and all places near one of
these meridians keep the time of that
one. It follows that places near
different meridians will keep times
differing by one or more hours. The
minute hands of all clocks keeping
Standard Time will agree.
Eastern Standard Time is the time
of 75 W.; Central Standard Time,
the time of 90 W. ; Mountain Time,
of 105 W.; Pacific Standard Time,
of 120 W.
8. How much does each of these
times differ from the time of Green-
wich?
9. Washington is 77 W. How
much does the Stadard Time differ
from its local time?
10. What is the difference be-
tween Eastern Time and Pacific
Time?
11. Boston is 71 W. Is Stand-
ard Time too fast or too slow for
Boston, and how much?
12. When it is 1 hr. 20 min. p.m.
Saturday, at 110 E., at what place
is 9 p. m. ? What is the day at the
latter place? Ans., Friday, 135 W.
13. What is the date and hour at
S. F., 122 W., when it is 8 a. m.,
May 1st, at Manila, 121 E.? Ans.,
3:48 p. m., April 30.
14. What is the date and hour at
Pekin, 116 E., when it is 11:40
a. m., Oct., 20th, at S. F., 122 W.?
Ans., 3:32 a. m., Oct. 21.
15. What is the time at Calcutta,
88 E., when it is 2 hr. 25 min. p. m.
at St. Paul, 93 W. ? Ans., 2:29
a. m., next day.
16. A ship which carries S. F.
(122 W.) time, finds the local time
to be 3 hr. 45 in. p. m., when the
S. F. time is 10 hr. 20 m. a. m.
What is the longitude of the ship?
Ans., 40 45' W.
17. At another time the local time
is found to be 8 hr. 27 m. a. m.
when the S. F. time is 2 hr. 35
m. p. m. Where is the ship? Ans.,
151 E.
18. Where is the ship when the
local time is 4 hr. 45 m. p. m.,
when the S. F. time is 6 hr. 30 m.
a. m.? Ans., 31 45' E.
PROBLEMS
117
19. If a ship carries Greenwich
time, what is its longitude when the
local time is 5 hr. 35 m. p. in. and
the Greenwich time is 2 hr. 50 m.
a. m. ? If it is Monday at Green-
wich, what is the day where the
ship is situated? Ans., 138 45' W.;
Sunday .
20. When it is 9:00 p. m. on
Friday at 110 W. it is 2:20 p. m.
at another place. What is the longi-
tude of the latter place? What is
the day of the week ? Ans., 150 E.,
Saturday.
21. W r hen it is 2:20 p. m. Sun-
day at 120 E. longitude, it is 8:05
p. m. at another place. What is the
longitude of the latter place, and
what day of the week is it? Ans.,
153 45' W.; Saturday.
22. The exact local time at Lick
Observatory is 8 hr. 6 min. 31.85
sec. slower than Greenwich time.
What is the longitude of the Obser-
vatory? Ans., 121 37' 57.75" W.
23. When it is 1 :35 p. m. Saturday
at 110 E., what is the hour and day
at 110 W.? Ans., 10:55 p. m.
Friday.
24. A watch is set right at Pekin,
116 30' E. On what meridian is
the watch when at noon it shows
9:20 a. m.? Ans., 156 30' E.
25. When it is 5 minutes after 4
o'clock on Sunday morning at Hono-
lulu, longitude 157 52' W., what is
the time at Sidney, Australia, longi-
tude 151 11' E. Ans., 41 m. 12 sec.
a. m.
26. When it is 10 o'clock p. m.
Wednesday, at longitude 20 E.,
what is the time at San Francisco,
122 W.? Ans., 12:32 p. m.
27. The time which is telegraphed
over the state from Mt. Hamilton is
Pacific Standard Time. What is the
difference between this and the ex-
act time of the Observatory?
Sawing Wood, Cutting Ice, Etc.
It is supposed in these problems
that the charge is in proportion to
the amount of work done.
1. If it costs $12 to survey the
sides of a square forty acre field,
how much will it cost to divide it
into square lots of two and a half
acres each? Ans., $18.
2. It cost $510 to fence a field
50 rods by 70 rods. How much ad-
ditional will it cost to divide the field
into lots 10 rods square? Ans.,
$1232.50.
3. If it costs $336 to fence a
field 36 rods by 60 rods, how much
additional will it cost to fence it
when divided into the largest possi-
ble equal square lots? Ans., $462.
4. It cost $1050 to build a solid
board fence about a lot 600 feet by
800 feet. How much additional should
be paid to fence it into lots 200 feet
by 150 feet? Ans., $1575.
5. If 60 cts. a cord is charged for
sawing 4 ft. wood into 16 in. sticks,
how much should be charged for
sawing the same wood into 12 in.
sticks? Ans., 90 cts.
The expense should be in propor-
tion to the amount of sawing, and
not to the number of sticks into which
each stick of cordwood is cut. A
diagram will be found helpful. For
problems like the sixth, note that a
stick of eight foot wood contain?
twice as much wood as a stick of
four foot wood.
6. If 75 cts. a cord is charged
for sawing 4 ft. wood into 12 in.
sticks, how much a cord should be
charged for sawing 8 ft. wood into
16 in. sticks? Ans.. 62^ cts.
7. 75 cts. a cord is charged for
sawing 4 ft. wood into 12 in. sticks,
the charge including 25 cts. for a
helper. If 30 cts. a cord is allowed
for a helper, how much should be
charged for sawing 8 ft. wood into
16 in. sticks? Ans., 71^ cts.
8. If 50 cts. a cord is charged _for
sawing 2 ft. wood into sticks 12 ins.
long, how much should be charged
118
ARITHMETIC
for sawing 5 cords of 4 ft. wood into
sticks of the same length? Ans.,
$3.75.
9. If 7 cts. is paid for sawing a
block of ice, 9X10X1 ft., into pieces
2X3X1 ft, what should be charged
for sawing a block 9X12X1 ft. into
pieces 3X4X1 ft? Ans., 5j4 cts.
10. If 6 cts. is charged for saw-
ing a block of ice 9X10X1 ft. into
pieces 3X5X1 ft., how much should
be charged for sawing a block 12 X
15X1 ft into pieces 3X6X1 ft?
Ans., 13% 9 cts.
11. If 11 cts. is charged for saw-
ing a block of ice 20'X30'X2' into
pieces 4'X5'X2' , how much should
be charged for sawing a block 15'
24' X 3' into pieces 3'X6'X3' ?
Ans., 10 2 % cts.
12. If 24 cts. is charged for paint-
ing a cubic foot of wood on the out-
side, how much additional should be
charged for painting it when divided
into pieces 2X3X4 in.?
Ans., 80 cts.
13. $13.05 is paid for polishing a
block of stone 8X10X12 ft How
much additional should be paid for
polishing the same when divided into
pieces 3X4X5 ft? Ans., $20.10.
14. If it takes 72 hours to lath a
room 48X60X15 ft, how long will
it take when it is divided into rooms
12X16X15 ft? Ans., 182% 7 hrs.
Working Problems.
When money is to be paid, divide
it among the workers in proportion
to the amount of work done.
1. A and B together can do a
piece of work in 15 days. After
working together 6 days, A leaves
and B finishes the work in 30 days
more. In how many days can each
alone do the work?
A, 21% da.; B, 50 da.
2. A and B together can do a
piece of work in 12 days. After
working together for 9 days, how-
ever, they call in C to help them, and
the three finish the work in 2 days.
In how many days can C alone do
the work? Ans., 24 da.
3. Henry can do a certain piece
of work in 18 hours, John can do
the same in 12 hours, and their fath-
er in 6 hours. Henry begins work
at 7 o'clock, John begins at 8, and
their father is to begin in time for
the work to be finished by noon.
When must their father begin work?
Ans., 9:40.
4. A can do a piece of work in
20 days, A and B in 12 days, B and
C in 10 days. In what time can C
do the work alone? Ans., 15 da.
5. Three men, 4 women, or 5
boys can do a job of work in 8
hours ; in what time can 1 man, 2
women, and 3 boys do it working
together? Ans., 5 2 % 3 hr.
6. One pipe can fill a tank in 8
hours, a second in 11 hours, a third
can empty it in 15 hours. If the
tank is empty and the pipes are all
opened, in what time will the tank
be filled? Ans., 6 1:i8 / 197 hr.
7. A, B and C can do a job of
work in 10, 12, and 15 days respec-
tively. A works 4 days, B 3 days,
and C finshes the work. If $30 is
paid for the work, how much should
each receive?
Ans., A, $12 ; B, $7.50 ; C, $10.50.
8. A, B and C together can do a
piece of work in 10 days; A and B
together in 12 days; B and C to-
gether in 20 days. How long will
it take each alone to do the work?
9. Henry and Samuel could have
done a piece of work in 15 hours,
but after working together for 6
hours, Samuel was left to finish it,
which he did in 30 hours. In what
time could Henry have finished the
work if Samuel had left at the end
of 6 hours?
10. A can dig a well in 8 days,
and B in 12 days. They work at it
on alternating days, A beginning.
How long will it take to dig the
well? If $24 is paid for digging the
PROBLEMS
119
well, how much should each re-
ceive ?
Ans., 3 l / 2 days; A receives $15;
B, $9.
, It is necessary in problems like
the tenth to find the period which is
repeated and deal with it as a whole.
A does one-eighth of the work in
one day. and B one-twelfth, hence
they do together five-twentyfourths
in two days. Since they work on al-
ternate days, the repeating period is
two days. It will take four whole
periods and there will remain four-
twentyfourths. On the day follow-
ing the fourth period A does three-
twentyfourths, leaving one-twenty-
fourth for B to finish. He can do
this in one-half a day.
11. A can do a job in 10 days,
B in 12 days. If A works in the
afternoons only, and B works all
day, how long will it take to do the
work ? How much should each re-
ceive if $15 is paid for the work?
Ans., 7%! da. : A rec. $5%! ; B
rec. $9%j.
12. A can do a piece of work in
10 days, B in 12 days, A and B
work on alternate forenoons, A be-
ginning; both work in the after-
noon. How long will it take to do
the work? $18 is paid for the
work. How much should each re-
ceive? Ans., 7% da.
13. A man and a boy undertake
a piece of work. The man alone can
do the work in 8 days, and the boy
in 12 If the man begins work on
the first day and works every other
day only, and the boy works every
day from the first, how long will it
take them to complete the work?
Ans., 6^/5 da.
14. A can do a piece of work in
10 hours and B in 12. They begin
the work together at 7 a. m. A
works an hour and rests half an
hour, and so continues. B works
all the time. When will the work
be completed? Ans., 1:35 p. m.
Traveling and Rowing.
1. Train No. 1, which travels 24
miles per hour, passes a stake in 15
sec. Train No. 2, which travels 30
miles per hour, passes a stake in 16
sec. How long is each train? How
long will it take the trains to pass
each other on a double track, if
going in opposite directions? How
long if going in the same direction?
Ans., length of trains, 528 ft.,
704 ft.
2. It is 120 miles from Yolo to
Milpitas. Train No. 1 (above) leaves
Yolo at 7 a. m. to go to Milpitas
and return, and stops 15 min. at
Milpitas. Train No. 2 (above)
leaves Yolo for Milpitas at 9 a. m.
Where will trains meet?
Ans., 10 miles from Milpitas.
Find the location of Train No. 2
when Train No. 1 starts back from
Milpitas. The first train reaches
Milpitas at 12 m. and starts back at
12 :15. The second train will be
97^ miles from Yolo and 22^ miles
from Milpitas at that time. They
now approach each other at a com-
bined rate of 54 miles an hour and
will meet in 25 minutes 10 miles
from Milpitas.
In problems where there is a
change of rate or a stop find the
position of the parties after the last
stop or change and then there will
be little difficulty in completing the
work.
3. The distance from San Jose
to San Francisco is 51 miles. A
can ride the distance in 4*4 hours,
B in 5% hours. A leaves S. F. for
San Jose at 8 o'clock; B leaves S.
J. for S. F. at 9 o'clock. When
will they meet?
Ans., 10:46 o'clock.
4. A and B start at 7 o'clock a.
m. to travel over the mountains into
San Joaquin valley. A travels 6
miles an hour up hill and 9 miles an
hour down hill. B travels 5 miles an
hour up hill and 10 miles an hour
down hill. It is 20 miles to the top
of the grade. When and where will
they next be together?
Ans., 5 p. m. ; 80 miles from San
lose.
ARITHMETIC
5. If A can go from Albany to
Boston in l / 2 hours, and B from
Boston to Albany in 11^ hours, and
they start at the same time, in how
many hours will they meet?
Ans., 5 2 %25 hrs.
6. A train 600 feet long is trav-
eling 25 miles an hour. How long
will it take it to pass entirely
through a tunnel 1800 feet long?
Ans., 1%! min.
7. James starts from San Fran-
cisco, which is 50 miles away, at 8
a. m. He rides 8 miles an hour for
3 hours, is delayed one hour by an
accident, and proceeds at 6 miles an
hour. Silas starts at 9 a. m. and
rides 7 miles an hour. Where will
he pass James?
Ans., 42 miles from S. F.
8. A wagon leaves San Jose at
7 a. m. to go to the coast, traveling
5 miles an hour up hill and 8 miles
an hour down hill. A carriage
leaves at 8 a. m. and travels 6
miles an hour up hill and 10 miles
an hour down hill. It is 20 miles
to the top of the grade and 40 miles
from the top to the point on the
coast. Where will the carriage over-
take the wagon?
Ans., 33^5 miles from San Jose.
9. A man can row 5 miles an
hour in still water. How fast can
he row against a current which runs
3 miles an hour? How fast can he
row with the same current?
10. How long will it take the
man to row up stream 12 miles and
back?
11. How far can he row down
stream and back in 5 hours?
12. A team can travel up hill 3
miles an hour and down hill 8 miles
an hour. How far can the team
travel up hill and back in 7 hours?
13. A man who travels by team
10 miles an hour, and on foot 4
miles an hour, has a journey of 36
miles to make. How far must he
'go by team that he may complete
the journey in six hours from the
time of starting? Ans., 20 mi.
14. A and B started from M and
N respectively and traveled till they
met, when it was learned that A
had traveled five-sevenths as far as
B. If A had traveled 18 miles far-
ther, and B had traveled the same as
at first, A would have traveled twice
as far as B. How far did each trav-
el? Ans., A 10 mi.; B 14 mi.
15. A starts to walk from P to
Q at the rate of 4 miles an hour,
and 1 hour later B starts from P and
overtakes A in 4 hours. Walking
on, B arrives at Q 2 hours before A.
Find the distance from P to Q.
Ans., 60 mi.
16. It is 11 miles from San Jose
to Los Gatos A carry-all leaves San
Jose at' 8 o'clock to go to Los Gatos
and return and travels 5 miles an
hour. When must a carriage which
travels 8 miles an hour leave San
Jose that it may meet the carry-all
and return to San Jose by 12
o'clock? Ans., 10:40.
17. It is 24 miles from San Jose
to the Lick Observatory. A car-
riage leaves San Jose at 9 a. m. and
travels up hill at the rate of 4 miles
an hour, stops an hour at the ob-
servatory, and returns at the rate of
10 miles an hour. A second car-
riage leaves San Jose at 3 p. m. and
travels at the rate of 5 miles an
hour. How far from San Jose will
the carriages pass each other?
Ans., 11^3 mi.
18. A man can row up stream 3
miles an hour and down the stream
7 miles an hour. How far can he
row up stream and back in 5 hours ?
Ans., \Q l /2 mi.
19. A started at 8 a. m. around
a mile track, walking at the rate of
5 miles an hour B started at 8:05
and walked in the same direction at
the rate of 4 miles per hour. If A
rests one minute at the end of each
mile, when will they first be to-
gether again? Ans., 9 o'clock.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
Los Angeles
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below.
BEC'D COL. LJB.
l4^ 51
Jbf?ry DEC 1 2196B
**
T'' : i "
^* '"n? 3 *^
'
n 41
0ft
EC z 7 J96Q
NOVi3 1961
QEC fi 1961
iiAY 8.1.
>^r*r> f\ IwV^y
otc o
r rec 23l9 6 ?
- REC'DMCD
DEC 463
Form L9-100m-9,'52(A3105
444
UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FAOUTY
A 000 937 1 50 1